project manual volume 2 - schuylercounty.us

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 Division 02 - Existing Conditions

through

Division 13 – Special Construction

Village of Watkins Glen - Clute Park Redevelopment

The Village of Watkins Glen, by its agent, the County of Schuyler

NY Route 414, Fourth Street Watkins Glen, NY 14891

LWRP Project Seneca 01 C1000968 LWRP Project Seneca 02 C1001169 NYS Ofc. of Parks, Rec. & Hist. Pres. EPF-164109 Downtown Revitalization Initiative C1001301 Stantec Project No.: 19156455

Stantec Consultant Services, Inc. 61 Commercial St., Suite 100 Rochester, NY 14614

Phone: 585-475-1440 Fax: 585-272-1814 www.stantec.com

May 7, 2020 Issued for Bid

Copyright 2020 Stantec Consulting Services, Inc. All rights reserved

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP C164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

SEALS PAGE 000107 - 1

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

A. Architect:

1. Thomas H. Castelein2. NYS# 0202503. Responsible for Divisions 01-49 Sections except

where indicated as prepared by other designprofessionals of record.

B. Civil Engineer:

1. Michael D. Mantell2. NYS# 0888833. Responsible for Sections 024116, 221113,

221313, and Division 31 and 33 Sections exceptwhere indicated as prepared by other designprofessionals of record.

C. Splash Pad and Ice Rink Engineer:

1. James R. Maland2. NYS# 0849033. Responsible for Division 13 Sections except

where indicated as prepared by other designprofessionals of record.

D. Landscape Architect:

1. Gary T. Sorge2. NYS# 0014713. Responsible for Section 015639 and Division 32

Sections.

E. Structural Engineer:

1. Michael J. Simmons.2. NYS# 0748083. Responsible for Sections 031000, 032000,

033000, 051200, 051213, 053100, 054000, 055000, 061516.

F. Fire-Protection & Plumbing Engineer:

1. Joseph H. Pawell

tewen

Image

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP C164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

SEALS PAGE 000107 - 2

2. NYS# 0964463. Responsible for Divisions 21 and 22 Sections

except where indicated as prepared by otherdesign professionals of record.

G. HVAC Engineer:

1. Timothy A. Howe2. NYS# 0951073. Responsible for Division 23 Sections and work

under Sections 089116 and 089119 related toDivision 23.

H. Electrical Engineer:

1. Jeri A. Pickett2. NYS# 0736713. Responsible for Divisions 26-28 Sections and

work under Section 078413 related to Divisions26-28.

END OF SECTION 000107

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF-164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 000101 Title Pages (Cover) 000107 Seals Page 000110 Table of Contents 000115 List of Drawings BIDDING REQUIREMENTS – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 001113 Advertisement for Bids 002113 Instructions to Bidders 002213 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 003132 Geotechnical Data 004116-0C Bid Form C – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-0E Bid Form E – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-0M Bid Form M – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-0P Bid Form P – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-1 Supplemental Bid Forms and Certificates 004313 Bid Security Forms CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 006000 General Conditions and Project Forms 006000-1 A201 – 2017 General Conditions of the Contract Rev. 10-2018 006000-2 NYS Office of Parks, Recreation and Historic Preservations Attachment A-1 Requirements 006000-3 Prevailing Wage Schedule for Article 8 Public Work Project 006000-4 Electronic Exchange Agreement 006100-0 Supplementary Conditions



SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 011000 Summary 011200 Multiple Contract Summary 012200 Unit Prices 012300 Alternates 012500 Substitution Procedures 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013233 Photographic Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 024116 Structure Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 031000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 032000 Concrete Reinforcing 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete



DIVISION 04 – MASONRY: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 0422000 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 – METALS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 051200 Structural Steel Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055116 Alternating Tread Steel Stairs DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 061000 Rough Carpentry 061063 Exterior Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 072100 Thermal Insulation 072419 Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) 072500 Weather Barriers 074113.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 074293 Soffit Panels 074646 Fiber-Cement, Concrete and Resin Siding 077100 Roof Specialties 077253 Snow Guards 078413 Penetration Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames



081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Frames 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 085113 Aluminum Windows 087111 Door Hardware 087113 Automatic Door Operators 088000 Glazing 089116 Operable Wall Louvers 089119 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 09 – FINISHES: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 092900 Gypsum Board Systems 093013 Ceramic Tiling 095113 Acoustic Panel Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096566 Resilient Athletic Flooring 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 101419 Dimensional Letter Signage 101423.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 102113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets 104416 Fire Extinguishers

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 114000 Food Service Equipment DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 122413 Roller Window Shades 123661.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 124813 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames



DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section Number and Title 130505 Splash Pad Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: E - Electrical Contract 130519 Splash Pad Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables: E – Electrical Contract 130526 Splash Pad Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: E – Electrical Contract 130533 Splash Pad Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems: E – Electrical Contract 131113 Splash Pad General: G – General Construction Contract 131118 Splash Pad Recreation Equipment: G – General Construction Contract 131213 Splash Pad Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Specialties: P – Plumbing Contract 131800 Ice Rink General: M – Mechanical Contract 131813.02 Ice Rink Floor – Portable Surface: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.01 Ice Rink Refrigeration General: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.05 Premanufactured Air-Cooled Chiller: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.15 Refrigeration System Insulation: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.16 Ice Rink Piping Specialties: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.17 Ice Rink Piping and Fittings: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.18 Ice Rink Valves: M- Mechanical Contract 131815.01 Ice System – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: E - Electrical Contract 131815.02 Ice System – Electrical Raceways and Fittings: E - Electrical Contract 131815.03 Ice System – Wires and Cables: E - Electrical Contract 131815.04 Ice System – Motors: M - Mechanical Contract 131815.08 Ice System – Electrical Testing: E - Electrical Contract 131816 Ice Rink Railings: G – General Construction Contract DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION: P – PLUMBING CONTRACT Section Number and Title 210517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire Suppression Piping 210518 Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping 210523 General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping 210529 Hangers and Supports for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment 210553 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment 211119 Fire Department Connections 211313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING: P – PLUMBING CONTRACT (unless noted otherwise) Section Number and Title 220513 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 220516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 220517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 220518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping



220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 220523.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 220523.14 Check Valves for Plumbing Piping 220523.15 Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 220800 Commissioning of Plumbing 221113 Facility Water Distribution: G – General Construction Contract 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221123.21 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps 221313 Facility Sanitary Sewers: G – General Construction Contract 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 221319.13 Sanitary Drains 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 223300 Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters 223400 Fuel-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters 224213.13 Commercial Water Closets 224213.16 Commercial Urinals 224216.13 Commercial Lavatories 224216.16 Commercial Sinks 224223 Commercial Showers 224713 Drinking Fountains DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC): M – MECHANCIAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 230519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 230523.12 Ball Valves for HVAC Piping 230523.14 Check Valves for HVAC Piping 230523.15 Gate Valves for HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548.13 Vibration Controls for HVAC 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 230923 Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC 230923.11 Control Valves 230923.12 Control Dampers



230923.14 Flow Instruments 230923.16 Gas Instruments 230923.19 Moisture Instruments 230923.22 Position Instruments 230923.23 Pressure Instruments 230923.27 Temperature Instruments 230923.43 Weather Stations 232113 Hydronic Piping 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 233600 Air Terminal Units 233713.13 Air Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 235216 Condensing Boilers 236313 Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 237313.13 Indoor, Basic Air-Handling Units 238236 Finned-Tube Radiation Heaters 238239.13 Cabinet Unit Heaters 238239.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL: E – ELECTRICAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 260519 Low Voltage Wire 260523 Control – Voltage Electrical Power Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Supports 260533 Raceways and Boxes 260553 Identification 260923 Lighting Controls 262200 Low-Voltage Transformers 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 262913.03 Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers 264313 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 265100 Interior Lighting 265619 Exterior Lighting



DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS: E – ELECTRICAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY: E – ELECTRICAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 284621.11 Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK: G – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 311000 Site Clearing & Erosion Control 312000 Earth Moving 312319 Dewatering 315000 Excavation Support and Protection DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS: G – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 321216 Asphalt Paving 321313 Concrete Paving 323300 Site Furnishings 329113 Soil Preparation 329200 Turf and Grasses 329300 Plants DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES: G – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 334200 Stormwater Conveyance 334600 Subdrainage

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968

Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169

Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF-164109

Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 000115 - 1

DOCUMENT 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of

Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled Issued for Bid, dated May 7, 2020, as

modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.

B. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of

type indicated:

1. General

a. G-000 TITLE SHEET

b. G-001 DRAWING LIST

c. G-021 CODE ANALYSIS & LIFE SAFETY PLANS

2. Civil

a. C-001 NOTES

b. C-002 LOGISTICS PLAN

c. CG-100 GRADING PLAN

d. CU-100 UTILITY PLAN

e. C-500 DETAILS

f. C-501 DETAILS

g. C-502 DETAILS

3. Landscape Architecture

a. L-001 REMOVALS PLAN

b. L-100 LAYOUT, MATERIALS & PLANTING PLAN

c. L-200 SITE DETAILS

4. Splash Pad

a. Q-101 SPLASH PAD LAYOUT PLAN

b. Q-102 SPLASH PIPING PLAN

c. Q-103 SPLASH PAD-WATER SERVICE ROOM PLANS & SECTIONS

d. Q-501 SPLASH PAD DETAILS

e. Q-502 SPLASH PAD DETAILS

f. QE-101 SPLASH PAD SITE ELECTRICAL PLAN

g. QE-102 SPLASH PAD EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING PLAN

5. Ice Rink

a. R-101 ICE RINK PIPING PLAN

b. R-102 ICE RINK EQUIPMENT BUILDING LAYOUT PLAN

c. R-103 ICE RINK INSULATION/PLYWOOD LAYER PLAN (ALT. BID No. 2)

d. R-501 ICE RINK DETAILS

e. R-502 AIR COOLED CHILLER PACKAGE SECTIONS (ALT. BID No. 1)

f. R-503 ICE RINK DETAILS (ALT. BID No. 2)

g. R-601 SECONDARY REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM






6. Structural

a. S-000 GENERAL NOTES

b. S-001 SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES

c. S-002 COLUMN LAYOUT PLAN – PAVILION & BATH HOUSE

d. S-100 FOUNDATION PLANS

e. S-120 PAVILION FRAMING PLANS

f. S-121 ROOF FRAMING PLANS

g. S-200 FRAMING ELEVATIONS

h. S-300 TYPICAL DETAILS

i. S-301 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS

j. S-310 TYPICAL DETAILS

k. S-311 FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS

l. S-312 FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS

7. Architecture

a. A-001 LEGENDS, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, GENERAL NOTES

b. A-101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN

c. A-102 MECH PLATFORM & BATH HOUSE ROOF PLAN

d. A-103 ROOF PLAN

e. A-104 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING PLAN

f. A-110 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

g. A-111 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING REFLECTED CEILING PLANS

h. A-141 FINISH PLAN & SCHEDULE

i. A-201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

j. A-202 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

k. A-301 BUILDING SECTIONS

l. A-310 PAVILION WALL SECTIONS

m. A-311 PAVILION WALL SECTIONS

n. A-312 BATHHOUSE WALL SECTIONS

o. A-313 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING WALL SECTIONS

p. A-321 SECTION DETAILS

q. A-322 SECTION DETAILS

r. A-401 ENLARGED PLANS

s. A-402 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS

t. A-501 PLAN DETAILS

u. A-502 PLAN DETAILS

v. A-503 TYPICAL EFIS DETAILS

w. A-504 TYPICAL METAL ROOF DETAILS

x. A-505 MILLWORK DETAILS

y. A-601 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS

z. A-602 PARTITION TYPES AND DETAILS

8. Fire Protection

a. FP-000 FIRE PROTECTION LEAD SHEET

b. FP-101 FIRE PROTECTION FIRT FLOOR COVERAGE PLAN

c. FP-201 FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR PLAN

d. FP-202 FIRE PROTECTION PLATFORM PLAN

e. FP-500 FIRE PROTECTION DETAILS

f. FP-600 FIRE PROTECTION SCHEDULES






9. Plumbing

a. P-000 PLUMBING LEAD SHEET

b. P-100 PLUMBING UNDERGROUND PLAN

c. P-101 PLUMBING FIRST FLOOR PLAN

d. P-102 PLUMBING PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

e. P-400 PLUMBING ENLARGED PLANS

f. P-500 PLUMBING DETAILS 1

g. P-501 PLUMBING DETAILS 2

h. P-502 PLUMBING DETAILS 3

i. P-600 PLUMBING SCHEDULES

j. P-601 PLUMBING SCHEDULES

k. P-700 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 1

l. P-701 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 2

m. P-702 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 3

10. Mechanical

a. M-000 MECHANICAL LEAD SHEET

b. MH-101 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK FIRST FLOOR PLAN

c. MH-102 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

d. MP-101 MECHANICAL PIPING FIRST FLOOR PLAN

e. MP-102 MECHANICAL PIPING PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

f. M-300 MECHANICAL SCHEMATICS

g. M-400 MECHANICAL ENLARGED PLANS

h. M-500 MECHANICAL DETAILS 1

i. M-501 MECHANICAL DETAILS 2

j. M-502 MECHANICAL DETAILS 3

k. M-600 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 1

l. M-601 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 2

m. M-800 CONTROLS SYMBOLS AND ARCHITECTURE

n. M-801 CONTROLS SCHEMATICS

o. M-802 CONTROLS SCHEMATICS

p. M-803 CONTROLS SHCEMATICS

11. Electrical

a. E-000 ELECTRICAL LEAD SHEET

b. EL-101 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING FIRST FLOOR PLAN

c. EL-102 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

d. EP-101 ELECTRICAL POWER FIRST FLOOR PLAN

e. EP-102 ELECTRICAL POWER PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

f. ES-101 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS FIRST FLOOR PLAN

g. ES-102 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

h. ESP-101 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN

i. E-300 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS

j. E-500 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

k. E-501 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

l. E-502 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

m. E-503 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

n. E-504 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

o. E-600 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES






p. E-601 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES


Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 - C1000968

Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 - C1001169


Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI - C1001301

STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 - 1

SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements.

2. Removing below-grade construction.

3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.

4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruction photographs

taken before building demolition.

3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade

site improvements not part of building demolition.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated

to be salvaged.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,

and store. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones

and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to

Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.






1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.

2. Temporary interruption of utility services.

3. Shutoff and capping of utility services.

C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that

recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician

and date refrigerant was recovered.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification

program.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner

under a separate contract.

D. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be demolished. A report on the

presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware

of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.






3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for materials that are known to be present

in buildings and structures to be demolished because of building operations or processes

performed there.

E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

2.2 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing

conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any

element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or

adjacent structures during building demolition operations.

D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building

demolition operations.

E. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs

or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Utilities to be Disconnected: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities

serving buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.

2. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal

remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed

and verified in writing.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural

support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction

being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.

B. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and

covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated.

Comply with requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

1. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.

2. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip

line of groups of trees to remain.

3. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people. .

C. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open

excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in

place.






3.5 DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods

required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain

portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least four hours after flame-cutting operations.

3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used

facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with

governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage

adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,

flooding, and pollution.

C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

3.6 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS

A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower

level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing

supporting members on the next lower level.

B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize

ground impact and dust generation.

C. Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged to be provided by owner.

D. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that

are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new

construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area.

1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings,

completely.






E. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures as noted on the

plan or that are within 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities

outside this area that will not remain in service if noted for removal.

1. Fill abandoned utility structures with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill

requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.7 SITE RESTORATION

A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building

demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in

Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free

from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades

and new grades.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved

construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Do not burn demolished materials.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition

operations began.

1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport.






CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 1

SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Form-facing material for cast-in-place concrete.

2. Shoring, bracing, and anchoring.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each of the following:

1. Exposed surface form-facing material.

2. Concealed surface form-facing material.

3. Form ties.

4. Form-release agent.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by, and signed and sealed by, a qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of forms.

1. For exposed vertical concrete walls, indicate dimensions and form tie locations.

2. Indicate dimension and locations of construction and movement joints required to

construct the structure in accordance with ACI 301.

a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Concrete Formwork: Design, engineer, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, shores, and

re-shores in accordance with ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and

construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads, so that resulting

concrete conforms to the required shapes, lines, and dimensions.






1. Design wood panel forms in accordance with APA's "Concrete Forming

Design/Construction Guide."

2. Design formwork to limit deflection of form-facing material to 1/240 of center-to-center

spacing of supports.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. As-Cast Surface Form-Facing Material:

1. Provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

2. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

3. Acceptable Materials: As required to comply with Surface Finish designations specified

in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as follows:

a. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

b. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with

DOC PS 1, and as follows:

1) APA HDO (high-density overlay).

2) APA MDO (medium-density overlay); mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.

3) APA Structural 1 Plyform, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

4) APA Plyform Class I, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Concealed Surface Form-Facing Material: Lumber, plywood, metal, plastic, or another

approved material.

1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.3 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch minimum.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

2. Form release agent for form liners shall be acceptable to form liner manufacturer.

C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed

concrete surface.






2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete

surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp-proofing

or waterproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FORMWORK

A. Comply with ACI 301.

B. Construct formwork, so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 and to comply with the

Surface Finish designations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for as-cast

finishes.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities as follows:

1. Surface Finish-1.0: ACI 117 Class D, 1 inch.

2. Surface Finish-2.0: ACI 117 Class B, 1/4 inch.

3. Surface Finish-3.0: ACI 117 Class A, 1/8 inch.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

1. Minimize joints.

2. Exposed Concrete: Symmetrically align joints in forms.

E. Construct removable forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete

surfaces.

1. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces.

2. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

3. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and other accessories, for easy removal.

F. Do not use rust-stained, steel, form-facing material.

G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces.

1. Provide and secure units to support screed strips.

2. Use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible.

1. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of

concrete mortar.






2. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

J. At construction joints, overlap forms onto previously placed concrete not less than 12 inches.

K. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work.

1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on

Drawings.

L. Construction and Movement Joints:

1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

2. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or

as approved by Architect.

3. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.

4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.

a. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-

girder intersection.

5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

6. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on Drawings or no greater than 40 feet.

a. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed

locations where possible.

M. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and

inspection.

1. Locate ports and openings in bottom of vertical forms, in inconspicuous location, to

allow flushing water to drain.

2. Close temporary ports and openings with tight-fitting panels, flush with inside face of

form, and neatly fitted, so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.

N. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

O. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

P. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.






3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with

items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and

other conditions.

4. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures, as indicated on Drawings.

5. Clean embedded items immediately prior to concrete placement.

3.3 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and

reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to

distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will

induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and

provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting

agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member being

formed.

2. Inspect insulating concrete forms for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete

member being formed.






CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000 - 1

SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel reinforcement bars.

2. Welded-wire reinforcement.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Each type of steel reinforcement.

2. Bar supports.

3. Mechanical splice couplers.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

C. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-066:

1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.

2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details of

mechanical splice couplers, details of welding splices, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and

supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Welding certificates.

1. Reinforcement to Be Welded: Welding procedure specification in accordance with AWS

D1.4/D1.4M






B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: CRSI's "Epoxy Coating Plant Certification."

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Steel Reinforcement:

a. For reinforcement to be welded, mill test analysis for chemical composition and

carbon equivalent of the steel in accordance with ASTM A706/A706M.

2. Mechanical splice couplers.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with

AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed.

C. Headed-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A970/A970M.

D. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars:

1. Steel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed bars.

2. Zinc Coating: ASTM A767/A767M, Class I zinc coated after fabrication and bending.

E. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain, fabricated from as-

drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

F. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, flat sheet.

G. Galvanized-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain, fabricated from

galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.






2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place.

1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in accordance with

CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and

as follows:

a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports the contact

forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire, all-plastic bar supports, or

CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports.

B. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch in diameter.

1. Finish: Plain, Galvanized.

C. Stainless Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1022/A1022M, not less than 0.0508 inch in diameter.

2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protection of In-Place Conditions:

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder.

2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

reduce bond to concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover.

2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar diameter, or not

less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater.






D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318.

E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings.

1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than 36 bar

diameters at splices, or 24 inches, whichever is greater.

2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318.

3. Mechanical Splice Couplers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated on

Drawings.

G. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths.

1. Support welded-wire reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard

Practice."

a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support spacing shall not

exceed 12 inches.

2. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one wire spacing plus 2 inches for plain

wire and 8 inches for deformed wire.

3. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

4. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Architect.


2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Comply with ACI 117.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and

inspections and to submit reports.






C. Inspections:

1. Steel-reinforcement placement.

2. Steel-reinforcement mechanical splice couplers.

3. Steel-reinforcement welding.






CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement

procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 031000 "Concrete Forming and Accessories" for form-facing materials, form

liners, insulating concrete forms, and waterstops.

2. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded-wire

reinforcement.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans materials

subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the Project site.


A. Product Data: For each of the following.

1. Portland cement.

2. Fly ash.

3. Slag cement.

4. Blended hydraulic cement.

5. Aggregates.

6. Admixtures:

a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials,

supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at






time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing

conditions, and use of other admixtures.

7. Vapor retarders.

8. Liquid floor treatments.

9. Curing materials.

10. Joint fillers.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:

1. Mixture identification.

2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength.

3. Durability exposure class.

4. Maximum w/cm.

5. Calculated equilibrium unit weight, for lightweight concrete.

6. Slump limit.

7. Air content.

8. Nominal maximum aggregate size.

9. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if

permitted.

10. Intended placement method.

11. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions,

weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

D. Concrete Schedule: For each location of each Class of concrete indicated in "Concrete

Mixtures" Article, including the following:

1. Concrete Class designation.

2. Location within Project.

3. Exposure Class designation.

4. Formed Surface Finish designation and final finish.

5. Final finish for floors.

6. Curing process.

7. Floor treatment if any.


A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.






3. Curing compounds.

4. Vapor retarders.

5. Joint-filler strips.

B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Portland cement.

2. Fly ash.

3. Slag cement.

4. Blended hydraulic cement.

5. Aggregates.

6. Admixtures:

C. Research Reports: For concrete admixtures in accordance with ICC's Acceptance Criteria

AC198.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each mix design.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing

ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for

production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed

Concrete Production Facilities."

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

testing on each concrete mixture.

1. Include the following information in each test report:

a. Admixture dosage rates.

b. Slump.

c. Air content.

d. Seven-day compressive strength.

e. 28-day compressive strength.






1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301and ACI 305.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120.

4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595/C595M cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source.

1. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean sand having hard durable, uncoated grains, free from

deleterious matter. Fineness modules shall be 2.85+ 0.20.

2. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crush stone having clean, hard, durable, uncoated

particles free from deleterious matter conforming to Size 57 class designation of 3S

typically and Size 67 class designation 2S for interior slabs.

3. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling

causing deleterious substances.

4. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one-year when tested in

accordance with ASTM C1293.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.






E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that

do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride in steel-reinforced

concrete.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.

F. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A.

1. Polyethlyene sheet not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended

adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

2. Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy kraft papers laminated together with glass-

fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side.

2.4 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of

inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates,

hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Curing Paper: Eight-feet- wide paper, consisting of two layers of fibered kraft paper laminated

with double coating of asphalt.

D. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1,

Class B.






F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Nondissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309,

Type 1, Class B, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of

floor covering.

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315,

Type 1, Class A.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs,

based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 25 percent by mass.

2. Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass.

3. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans, Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass, with fly ash or

pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by mass.

4. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 35 percent by mass with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent by mass.

C. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when

characteristics of materials, job conditions, pumping, weather, test results, or other

circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by the Owner's

Representative. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be

submitted to and accepted by the Owner's Representative before using in work.

1. Use admixtures for water reducing and set control in strict compliance with

manufacturer's directions.

2. Addition of water at the site shall not be permitted except by written approval by the

engineer. as indicated in Part 3 of this specification.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Class A: Normal-weight concrete used for footings, foundation walls, and piers.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cement: 517 lb/cy.






3. Maximum w/cm: 0.52.

4. Slump Limit: 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch before adding high-range water-reducing

admixture or plasticizing admixture at Project site.

5. Air Content: 6 +/- 2%

B. Class B: Normal-weight concrete used for interior slabs-on-ground.






5. Air Content: Non-entrained mix.

C. Class C: Normal-weight concrete used for interior suspended slabs.






5. Air Content: Non-entrained mix.

D. Class D: Normal-weight concrete used for interior suspended slabs.






5. Air Content: 6 +/- 2%.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with

ASTM C94/C94M and ASTM C1116/C1116M and furnish batch ticket information.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Shall not be permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.






1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with

items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.

3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and

other conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with

ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour.

2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour.

3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches, sealing vapor

retarder to concrete.

4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing

entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps.

6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions.

7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete.

a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping

damages area by 6 inches on all sides, and sealing to vapor retarder.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence.

1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on

Drawings or as approved by Architect.


a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and

slabs.

3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset joints in

girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.






6. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on

Drawings, locate vertical joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in

concealed locations where possible.

C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete

into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of

concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of control joints after applying

surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive

or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action

does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random

cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below

finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints:

1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings.

2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one

side of joint.

F. Dowel Plates: Install dowel plates at joints where indicated on Drawings.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items,

and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.

1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient

installation, and repair defective areas.

2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make

necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.

B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of

concrete placement.






C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete

delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with

ACI 301.

a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.

b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly

penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.

c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose

plasticity.

d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate

concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items

without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence.

2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas.

6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.

8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.






3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. As-Cast Surface Finishes:

1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing

material.

a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep.

b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch (25 mm).

c. Tie holes do not require patching.

d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 (ACI 117M) Class D.

e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

2. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing

material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.

a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide or 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep.

b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm).

c. Patch tie holes.

d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 (ACI 117M) Class B.

e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed

finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to

concrete as indicated on the drawings.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed

surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching adjacent formed

surfaces.

2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed

surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing

operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish:

1. While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or

darbied.

2. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one

direction.

3. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings or to receive mortar

setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.






C. Float Finish:

1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to

permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete surface with power-

driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats.

2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,

granular texture and complies with ACI 117 (ACI A117M) tolerances for conventional

concrete.

3. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish:

1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or

power-driven trowel.

2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and

uniform in texture and appearance.

3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor

coverings.

4. Do not add water to concrete surface.

5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater than 3

percent.

6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-

finish coating system.

7. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and

placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry

tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly

scarify surface with a fine broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations

indicated on Drawings.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive finish to concrete stair treads,

platforms, ramps as indicated on Drawings

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In:






1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place

unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.

3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and

terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

2. Construct concrete bases as indicated on the drawings.


4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices.

a. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished

with items to be embedded.

b. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases.

c. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.

1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings.

2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.8 CONCRETE CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing.

2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing.

3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h, calculated in accordance with

ACI 305.1, before and during finishing operations.

B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:

1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other

similar surfaces.

2. Cure concrete containing color pigments in accordance with color pigment

manufacturer's instructions.

3. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.






4. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing

period, as follows:

a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final

setting of concrete.

b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet.

c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply

additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously

wet.

d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with

sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams.

e. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation

by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application.

2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:

1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete.

2. Interior Concrete Floors:

a. Floors to Receive Floor Coverings Specified in Other Sections: Contractor has

option of the following:

1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit

application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive

cover over entire area of floor.

a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12-inches.

b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration

of curing period, but not less than seven days.

2) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-

retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with

sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or

adhesive.

a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using

cover material and waterproof tape.

b) Cure for not less than seven days.

3) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces

continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a

combination of, the following:

a) Water.

b) Continuous water-fog spray.






b. Floors to Receive Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments: Contractor has option of

the following:




a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12 inches.



2) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-

retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with

sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or

adhesive.

a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using

cover material and waterproof tape.

b) Cure for not less than seven days.




a) Water.


c. Floors to Receive Polished Finish: Contractor has option of the following:




a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12 inches.






a) Water.


d. Floors to Receive Chemical Stain:

1) As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring

concrete surface, install curing paper over entire area of floor.






2) Install curing paper square to building lines, without wrinkles, and in a

single length without end joints.

3) Butt sides of curing paper tight; do not overlap sides of curing paper.

4) Leave curing paper in place for duration of curing period, but not less than

28 days.

e. Floors to Receive Urethane Flooring:

1) As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring

concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor.

2) Rewet absorptive cover and cover immediately with polyethylene moisture-

retaining cover with edges lapped 6 inches and sealed in place.

3) Secure polyethylene moisture-retaining cover in place to prohibit air from

circulating under polyethylene moisture-retaining cover.

4) Leave absorptive cover and polyethylene moisture-retaining cover in place

for duration of curing period, but not less than 28 days.

f. Floors to Receive Curing Compound:

1) Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application.

3) Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

4) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound

without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing

compound manufacturer.

g. Floors to Receive Curing and Sealing Compound:

1) Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by

power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial

application.

3) Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity

of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

3.10 APPLICATION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment

in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.






1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and

complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days' old unless recommended in the

manufacturers’ specifications.

3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing.

4. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry.

5. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to

hardened concrete by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections

and prepare testing and inspection reports.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests

and inspections and to submit reports.

1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite samples

on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in accordance with

ASTM C31/C31M.

2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete

manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents.

3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner,

Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests.

a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M,

ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test

and inspection:

1) Project name.

2) Name of testing agency.

3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians

performing inspections and testing.

4) Name of concrete manufacturer.

5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing.

6) Date and time of concrete placement.

7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples.

8) Date and time sample was obtained.

9) Truck and batch ticket numbers.

10) Design compressive strength at 28 days.

11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials.

12) Field test results.






13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including

curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial

curing period.

14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28 days.

C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing

agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size,

design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at

Project site.

D. Inspections:

1. Headed bolts and studs.

2. Verification of use of required design mixture.

3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

6. Batch Plant Inspections: On a random basis, as determined by Architect.

E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50

cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test

for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Slump Flow: ASTM C1611/C1611M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test

for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete.

a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour

of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M:






a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above,

and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C567/C567M fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete.

a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour

of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test:

a. Compression Test Specimen ASTM C 31; one set of 6 standard cylinders for each

compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for

laboratory cured test specimens except when field cure test specimens are required.

b. Compressive Strength Tests ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5

cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. over and above the first 25 cu. yds.

of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, one

specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing

if required.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength,

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi, or no compressive

strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified

compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

11. Additional Tests:

a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test

results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of

concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other

methods as directed by Architect.

1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with

ACI 301, section 1.6.6.3.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.






F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 within 48 hours

of completion of floor finishing and promptly report test results to Architect.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:

1. Protect from petroleum stains.

2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces.

3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs.

4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.

5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.

6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.

7. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering,

recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

8. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive surface hardener or polished concrete

finish using Floor Slab Protective Covering.



CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Steel reinforcing bars.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include data on material properties.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost



or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. CMUs: ASTM C90. 1. Density Classification: Normal weight.

C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C55. 1. Density Classification: Normal weight.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.



F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

G. Water: Potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.1875-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.1875-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.

2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Copper: ASTM B370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or

0.0216 inch thick or ASTM B370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0162 inch thick.

3. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

4. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

5. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between two layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=10021

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457130262



2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 3) Wire-Bond. 4) York Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) DuPont de Nemours, Inc. 2) Protecto Wrap Company. 3) Wire-Bond.

C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Mortar Net Solutions.

D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).












2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to

ASTM C143/C143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.



3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.



3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes including EIFS (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 FLASHING

A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.



2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 48 inches.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.



3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. Test mortar for compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C1019.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Masonry Waste: Remove clean masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.






STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Shear stud connectors.

3. Shrinkage-resistant grout.


1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional

requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in

ANSI/AISC 303.


A. Product Data:

1. Structural-steel materials.

2. High-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

3. Anchor rods.

4. Threaded rods.

5. Shop primer.

6. Galvanized-steel primer.

7. Etching cleaner.

8. Galvanized repair paint.

9. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated on Drawings to comply

with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.








B. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical properties.

C. Source quality-control reports.



A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is accredited

by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance Criteria 172).

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification

Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. ANSI/AISC 303.

2. ANSI/AISC 360.

3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

B. Connection Design Information:

1. Design connections and final configuration of member reinforcement at connections in

accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 by fabricator's qualified professional engineer.

a. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.

C. Moment Connections: Type PR, partially restrained.

D. Construction: Combined system of moment frame and shear walls.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, Grade 50






B. Channels, Angles, ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS

A. High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 Type 1,

heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and

ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1 compressible-washer type

with plain finish.

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M,

Grade A325Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex

carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.

2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1, compressible-washer type

with mechanically deposited zinc coating finish.

2.4 RODS

A. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Straight.

2. Finish: Plain.

B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Finish: Plain or as indicated on the drawings.

C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36.

1. Finish: Plain or as indicated on the drawings.

2.5 FORGED-STEEL STRUCTURAL HARDWARE

A. Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-1035.






2.6 PRIMER

A. Steel Primer:

1. Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

2. SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.

3. Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.7 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT

A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, metallic

aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute

working time.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency

suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in

accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360.

B. Shear Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Weld using automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Exterior Splayed Building Columns:

1. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at

concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite

erection.

2. Use special care handling and fabricating AESS before and after shop painting to

minimize damage to shop finish.

a. Fabricate to Category AESS 1:

i. Comply with overall profile dimensions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M for welded built-

up members. Keep appearance and quality of welds consistent. Maintain true

alignment of members without warp exceeding specified tolerances.

ii. Prepare surfaces according to Part 2 "Shop Priming" Article and SSPC-

SP 6 (WAB)/NACE WAB-3.

iii. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges to remove burrs and provide

smooth surfaces and eased edges.

iv. Make intermittent welds appear continuous, using filler or additional welding.

v. Seal weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch closure plates.






vi. Limit butt and plug weld projections to 1/16 inch.

vii. Install bolt heads on the same side of each connection and maintain orientation

consistently from one connection to another.

viii. Remove weld spatter, slivers, and similar surface discontinuities.

ix. Remove blemishes and surface irregularities resulting from temporary braces or

fixtures by filling or grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming.

x. Grind tack welds smooth unless incorporated into final welds.

xi. Remove backing and runoff tabs, and grind welds smooth.

2.9 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.10 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel in

accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2.11 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).

5. Galvanized surfaces unless indicated to be painted.

6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications

and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2.

2. SSPC-SP 3.

3. SSPC-SP 7 (WAB)/NACE WAB-4.






4. SSPC-SP 6 (WAB)/NACE WAB-3.

C. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Prepare galvanized-steel surfaces for shop priming by

thoroughly cleaning steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treating with

etching cleaner.

D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness

of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and

exposed surfaces.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and

inspections.

1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or

produced to perform tests and inspections.

2. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.

4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear stud connectors in

accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

5. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with

requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.






3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with

ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360.

B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface

of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before

packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so

no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply

with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303.

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of

temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special

inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.

3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.






a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's

option:

1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.

2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not

accepted.

3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.






STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.

2. Composite floor deck.

3. Noncomposite form deck.



1. Roof deck.

2. Composite floor deck.

3. Noncomposite form deck.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,

cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Research reports.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M,

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to

AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members."

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI

Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the

following:

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40

minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40, zinc

coating.

3. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS),

Grade 40, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard

baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Deck Profile: As indicated.

5. Profile Depth: As indicated.

6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.

2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and

interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite

Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated,

and with the following:

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40

minimum, with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and underside surface shop

primed with manufacturers' standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.

2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc

coating.

3. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS),

Grade 33, G60 zinc coating; with unpainted top surface and cleaned and pretreated

bottom surface primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.






4. Profile Depth: As indicated.

5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements

indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000

psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of

profile indicated or required for application.

F. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747-inch thick, of same material and finish as

deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M.

H. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in

SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

C. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting

through or adjacent to deck.

D. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of deck, and support of other work.

E. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.






F. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical

fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and flanges to

top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one fastener

at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or

mechanically fasten.

H. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end

closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld

or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

I. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting

structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

J. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,

according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and

sides of deck.

3.2 REPAIR

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck

with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of

prime-painted deck immediately after installation and apply repair paint.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Roof rafter framing. 4. Soffit framing.





1. Cold-formed steel framing materials. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing. 4. Roof-rafter framing. 5. Soffit framing. 6. Vertical deflection clips. 7. Single deflection track. 8. Double deflection track. 9. Drift clips. 10. Post-installed anchors. 11. Power-actuated anchors. 12. Sill sealer gasket.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.





B. Product certificates.

C. Product test reports.

D. Research Reports:

1. For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. ClarkDietrich. 2. MarinoWARE. 3. The Steel Network, Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.







B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following:

1. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 2. Headers: AISI S212. 3. Lateral Design: AISI S213. 4. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60.

2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Section Properties: To suit member size/designation indicated on Drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.


a. ClarkDietrich. b. MarinoWARE.






c. The Steel Network, Inc.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

2.5 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Section Properties: To suit member size/designation indicated on Drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.


a. ClarkDietrich. b. MarinoWARE. c. The Steel Network, Inc.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.








G. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width required.



2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

H. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.



2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

I. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645.



2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch. 3. Depth: 7/8 inch.

2.6 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING

A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


















2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum. 4. Section Properties: To suit member size/designation indicated on Drawings.

2.7 SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:



2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum. 4. Section Properties: To suit member size/designation indicated on Drawings.

2.8 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123/A123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel headless, hooked bolts, carbon-steel nuts, and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on










ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC193, ICC-ES AC58, or ICC-ES AC308, as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchor, Torque-controlled adhesive anchor, or

adhesive anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M or SSPC-Paint 20.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims.

E. Sill Sealer Gasket: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.



B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required to obtain fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sill sealer gasket at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

G. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

H. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.



B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.



D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOIST FRAMING

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,

steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections.

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Joist Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers, consisting of joist and joist track or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement.



1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:

1. Combination Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.

3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.7 REPAIRS

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.






METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.

2. Shelf angles.

3. Metal ladders.

4. Metal floor plate and supports.

5. Structural-steel door frames.

6. Miscellaneous steel trim.

7. Metal bollards.

8. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.



1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.

2. Fasteners.

3. Shop primers.

4. Shrinkage-resisting grout.

5. Prefabricated building columns.

6. Manufactured metal ladders.

7. Metal bollards.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design ladders.

B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Ladders shall withstand the effects of loads and

stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276/A276M, Type 304.

D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with

ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D.

E. Rolled-Stainless Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793.

F. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate.

G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6.

J. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

K. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

L. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).

M. Bronze Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or UNS No. C84400

(leaded semired brass).

N. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel

bronze).






2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use

and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M,

Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise indicated;

galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast

steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per

ASTM F2329/F2329M.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments

that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and

compatible with topcoat.

D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal

and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

H. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-

weight, air-entrained concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed

surfaces.






C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally

welded steel strap anchors, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches

o.c.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent

construction.

B. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes

indicated.

1. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes

at 24 inches o.c.

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel

baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and

connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe

wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 METAL LADDERS

A. General:






1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Siderails: Continuous, a minimum 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.

3. Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter, steel bars.

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.

6. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets.

7. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.

2.8 METAL FLOOR PLATE

A. Fabricate from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:

1. Thickness: As indicated.

B. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.

C. Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each

section.

2.9 STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES

A. Fabricate structural-steel door frames from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to

dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 5/8-by-1-1/2-inch steel channel stops, unless

otherwise indicated. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints.

Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to accept finish hardware.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining

concrete or masonry.

B. Galvanize exterior steel frames.

C. Prime steel frames with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed

field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with

other work.






1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry

construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete

construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize bearing and leveling plates.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.12 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and

recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for

each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit

where indicated.

B. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.13 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from

concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than

two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.14 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.






B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded

in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning."

3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance

Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

4. Other Steel Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

5. Galvanized-Steel Items: SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated

Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and

levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and

other connectors.






E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including

manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions overhead doors and overhead grilles securely

to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders

with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of

pipe columns.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with ANSI/AISC 360, "Specifications for

Structural Steel Buildings," and with requirements applicable to listing and labeling for fire-

resistance rating indicated.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have

been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if

protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with shrinkage-resistant

grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.5 REPAIRS

A. Touchup Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.

Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply

with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.



ALTERNATING TREAD STEEL STAIRS 055116 - 1

SECTION 055116 - ALTERNATING TREAD STEEL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Alternating tread steel stairs.

B. Related work specified elsewhere includes but is not limited to:

1. Metal Fabrications in another Division 5 section.

2. Painting in Division 9.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.


A. Product Data: For alternating tread steel stairs.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and field joints. 3. Include plan at each level. 4. Indicate locations of anchors and weld plates.






A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1.7 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Landings, Treads, and Mounting Base: shall be stamped and formed from single piece material. Stock shapes, hand forming, or welded remnants shall not be permitted. All stamped parts shall have integrally formed rigidizing bends and shall be spot welded to stringers of like material.

B. Welds: shall be a minimum of 6 welds per tread, and 12 welds each on the landing and mounting base. Each weld shall be quality controlled and be capable of withstanding a minimum of 2,800 lbs. in shear.

C. Pedestrian Surfaces: shall be punched through with upset non-skid openings.

D. Riser Spacing: shall be equally spaced to within 3/16" for adjacent risers and to within 3/8" for any two non-adjacent risers on a stair.

E. Guards and Handrails: shall be contoured for body guidance and underarm support and shall be attached to the outside stringers and landings by bolting.

F. Landing Reinforcement: shall be with 1/4" steel angle notched and punched, and factory welded to the landing at the points of a guard or handrail attachment.

G. Rubber Foot Divider: shall be affixed to the central portion of the landing. A rubber bumper strip shall be attached or will be provided for field attaching to the central stringer.

1.8 DIMENSIONS

A. The contractor shall perform field measurements of alternating tread stair installation sites and verify vertical distance between floors.

B. Alternating Tread Stair Angle: 56 or 68 degrees from horizontal as specified in the drawings.

C. Vertical Drop: the change in elevation, as shown in the drawings, between the upper finished floor surface where the top landing will be attached and the lower finished floor surface where the base of the alternating tread stair will be secured.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in good condition and properly protected against damage to finished surfaces.



B. Store material in a location and manner to avoid damage. Do not stack components. Lay out components on firm foundation material such that bending cannot occur.

C. Store metal components in a clean dry location, away from uncured concrete, cement, or masonry products, acids, oxidizers, rainwater, or any other chemical or substance that might damage the material or finish.

D. Plan work and storage locations to keep on-site handling to a minimum.

E. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to material finishes or unprotected surfaces when handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing and guard loads in

addition to loads specified above. 5. Alternating Tread Stair Stringers: shall be capable of withstanding a single concentrated

load of 1,000 pounds at any point on the stair without permanent deformation. 6. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360.

B. Structural Performance of Railings and Guards: Railings and guards shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Carbon Steel:

1. Treads: 13 Gauge; Minimum 36 ksi yield stress; AISI 1010/15 HRPO or ASTM A1011 structural steel (SS) type grade 36 (or higher).



2. Landing & Foot Stampings: 11 Gauge; Minimum 36 ksi yield stress; AISI 1010/15 or ASTM A1011 structural steel (SS) type grade 36 (or higher).

3. Top Landing Support Clips: Formed L2 x 2 x ¼” x 4” lg. with 5/8” Φ round holes and 5/8” x 1” slot holes, ASTM A1011 structural steel (SS) Type, grade 36 (or higher)

4. Stringers:

a. 2" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge U section; minimum 36 ksi yield stress; AISI 1010/15 or ASTM A1011 structural steel (SS) Type, grade 36 (or higher) for 56 degree stairs under 10 vertical feet and for 68 degree stairs under 12 vertical feet.

b. 3" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge U section; minimum 36 ksi yield stress AISI 1010/15 or ASTM A1011 structural steel (SS) Type, grade 36 or higher for 56 degree stairs over 10 vertical feet and for 68 degree stairs over 12 vertical feet.

5. Handrails: 1 1/2" OD x 0.095"; Minimum 42 ksi yield stress; AISI 1010/15 CS or ASTM A1011 cold drawn, fully annealed tube per ASTM A513 grade 1026 or higher As-welded tubing or ASTM A500 Grade B.

B. Fasteners

1. Bolts: handrail to stringer; Hex Head SAE J429 Grade 5, ½”-diameter x 13 TPI

2. Landing to structure; Carriage Head A307 or Hex Head SAE J429 Grade 5, ½” Φ x 13 TPI ; dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1

3. Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A, B, C, D or O; dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.2.2.

4. Washers ASTM F436 or F844, dimensions per ANSI/ASME B18.22.1

C. Miscellaneous Material:

1. Rubber Spine: Hollow neoprene

2. Rubber Foot Divider: Solid Santoprene

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate alternating tread steel stairs to conform with performance and construction requirements, and in accordance with approved shop drawings or dimensional prints. Fabricate and shop-assemble to greatest extent possible.

B. Carbon Steel: gas metal arc welded with treads spot welded to stringers and bolt-on handrails with included bolts using the specified materials.



2.4 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard gray primer: epoxy powder coat.

2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate start and installation of steel alternating tread stair with all other related and adjacent work. Installation shall not start until the construction has progressed to the point that weather conditions and remaining construction operations will not damage alternating tread stair installation.

B. Verification: Verify that dimensions and angle are correct, and that substrate is in proper condition for alternating tread stair installation. Do not proceed with installation until all necessary corrections have been made.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. If bumper has not been installed at the factory, install the bumper in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions (peel and stick).

B. Prepare mounting holes.

C. Position alternating tread stair with top tread at same elevation as upper finished floor or roof surface.

D. Secure alternating tread stair with not less than 2 bolts or studs at top and with not less than 2 at bottom of stair.

E. Touch up with matching paint any chipped or abraded damage to factory finish or

3.3 CLEAN-UP

A. Leave work area clean and free of debris.


ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking, girts, and nailers. 4. Wood furring. 5. Wood sleepers. 6. Plywood backing panels.


1. Section 061063 "Exterior Rough Carpentry." 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing, subflooring, and underlayment.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that



periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.



2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load bearing. 2. Species:

a. Northern species; NLGA. b. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. c. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

B. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species:

a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. c. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. d. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. e. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

C. Ceiling Joists: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1. Species:

a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. c. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. d. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. e. Northern species; NLGA. f. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1. Species:

a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. c. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.



d. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. e. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 2. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193, or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.



2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS


1. KC Metals Products, Inc. 2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 3. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.


A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

C. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

1. Verify adhesives have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.

D. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.





http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=143



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

F. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 061063 - 1

SECTION 061063 - EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fiber cement screening system (equipment screens).

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal in thickness and 2 inches nominal or greater in width.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood and fiber cement board products.

1. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.


A. Material Certificates:

1. For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

2. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

3. For cement fiber boards. Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

B. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed wood products not marked with grade stamp.

C. Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated wood products, from ICC-ES.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A minimum of 10 years in the manufacture of PVC products.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum of 3 years in the installation of PVC products.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of profiles and installation techniques and workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Include mock-up for each location indicated on the Drawings 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 4. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.


A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, mark grade stamp on end or

back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content:

1. Dimension Lumber: 19 percent.

2.2 POSTS

A. Dimension Lumber Posts: No. 2 grade and any of the following species:

1. Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), or Douglas fir-south; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.



B. Timber Posts: Southern pine; No. 1, SPIB.

2.3 BOARDS

A. Fiber Cement Board, General: ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. c. Nichiha Architectural Panels.

B. Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch (4/4 nominal).

C. Pattern: 6” nominal width boards with woodgrain texture.

D. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.

2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use Category UC4a for posts.

B. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use Category UC4B.

C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.

D. After treatment, redry dimension lumber to 19 percent maximum moisture content.

E. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.

F. Application: Treat all posts.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and







manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.

1. Use stainless steel.

B. Nails: ASTM F1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70.

D. Wood Screws and Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.1, or ICC-ES AC233.

E. Carbon-Steel Bolts: ASTM A307 with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers all hot-dip zinc coated.

F. Stainless Steel Bolts: ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; with ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

2.6 METAL ACCESSORIES


1. KC Metals Products, Inc. 2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 3. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G185 coating designation.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Apply copper naphthenate field treatment to comply with AWPA M4, to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.







F. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners. 2. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.



B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201/D3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to ASTM D5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F shall be not less than span ratings specified.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.

2.3 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than required to suit 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated.

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177/C1177M.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Gypsum. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation.

2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.








1. Span Rating: Not less than required to suit 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

1. Verify adhesive has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.




D. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements. 4. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might

retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.



1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.



PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad

architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.



1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets.



1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.




A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.

B. Research reports.

C. Field quality control reports.


A. Shop drawings corrected based on approved markups.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.



C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.


a. Formica Corporation. b. Pionite; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. c. Wilsonart LLC.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 5. Pattern Direction: Horizontally for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

G. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Medium density particleboard.







3. Drawer Bottoms: Medium density particleboard.

H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join sub-fronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2. Match Architect's sample. 3. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following

categories:

a. Solid colors, matte finish.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Particleboard (Medium Density): ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter, of material indicated.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B03141.



E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.

F. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer.

a. Type: Full extension. b. Material: Epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers.

2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

3. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.

5. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

G. Door Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Door and Drawer Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Color: Black.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for ANSI/BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel: ANSI/BHMA 630.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.9.


A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.



2.5 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.

B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws.

D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims.

1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.



C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation. 3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 5. Mineral-wool board insulation. 6. Closed-cell spray foam insulation.



1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation. 3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 5. Mineral-wool board insulation. 6. Closed-cell spray foam insulation.


A. Installer's Certification: Listing type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in each element of the building thermal envelope.

1. Sign, date, and post the certification in a conspicuous location on Project site.

B. Product test reports.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type IV, ”Rigid Insulation” at foundations: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced.




a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning.

2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly. 5. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12

inches and wider in width. 6. inches and wider in width.

2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced, ”Rigid Insulation” at roofing: ASTM C1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II, Class 2.


a. Firestone Building Products. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Rmax, Inc.

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.

3. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width.

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Unfaced, ”Batt Insulation”: ASTM C665, Type I;; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.


a. CertainTeed Insulation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Owens Corning.

2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.















4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width.

2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, Unfaced for filling small voids in mineral-wool board insulaton: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company; FS-15 or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Rockwool International.

2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12

inches and wider in width.

2.5 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION

A. Mineral-Wool Board Insulation, Types IA and IB, Unfaced, “Rigid Mineral Wool”: ASTM C612, Types IA and IB; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company; FireSpan 40 or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Rockwool International.

2. Nominal Density: 4 lb/cu. ft.. 3. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than zero when tested in accordance with

ASTM E84. 5. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12

inches and wider in width.

2.6 CLOSED-CELL SPRAY-FOAM INSULATION

A. Closed-Cell Spray Foam Insulation, “Closed Cell Spray Foam”: ASTM C1029, Type 1, two-component, medium density.














a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Huntsman c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

2. Core Density: ASTM D1622, minimum 2pcf. 3. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C518, 140-degreeF/90day, aged R-Value, measured at 75F

mean Temp; minimum R6.0/inch. 4. Flame Spread: ASTM E84, Class A, 25 or less. 5. Smoke Developed: ASTM E84, Class A, 450 or less. 6. Compressive Strength (minimum): ASTM D1621, 10% parallel to rise: 20 psi. 7. Closed Cell Content: ASTM D2856, minimum 95 percent. 8. Water Absorption by Volume (maximum): ASTM D2842, 2.5 percent. 9. Water Vapor Permeability maximum: ASTM E96, 2.5 perm-inches.

B. Primers:

1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for surfaces conditions.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.

2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.

B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.


D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.







PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed.

D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation as indicated below exterior grade line.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

A. Butt panels together for tight fit.

B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors.

C. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.



2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C1320.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

2. Spray Foam Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CLOSED-CELL SPRAY-FOAM INSULATION

A. Examination:

1. Verify existing conditions are ready to receive work 2. Ensure surfaces are free of frost, oil, grease, oxidation, dirt, loose paint, loose scale, or

other deleterious material that would impair bond. 3. Ensure that items required to penetrate sprayed insulation are installed prior to

installation of sprayed insulation. 4. Beginning of application implies acceptance of existing conditions.

B. PREPARATION

1. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from overspray. 2. Apply any required primers for special conditions as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cover wide joints with transition sheet membrane as specified in Section 07 27 50. 4. Clean area of work prior to application of sprayed insulation. 5. Post all required warning signs.

C. APPLICATION

1. Must be installed by Manufacturer-approved applicator. 2. Apply SPF in accordance with ASTM C1029 and manufacturer’s installation guidelines:

complying with preparation methods. 3. Apply sprayed foam insulation in consecutive layers of not less than ½ inch and not more

than 2 inches thick each to achieve total thickness required (total thickness as indicated per application). For light gage steel and extruded polystyrene board first layer should be a skim coat of ½ inch before adding extra layers. Ensure the substrate is well supported.

4. Avoid formation of sub-layer air pockets. 5. Apply product in overlapping layers, so as to obtain a smooth, uniform surface.



6. Maintain 3 inch clearance around chimneys, heating vents, steam pipes, recessed lighting fixtures and other heat sources.

7. Do not apply Product to inside of exit openings or electrical junction boxes.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 1

SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate. 2. Water-resistive barrier coatings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E2110 apply to Work of this Section.

B. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s).

C. IBC: International Building Code.




A. Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessory, including water-resistive barrier coatings.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include details for EIFS buildouts. 2. Include details for parapet cap flashing.



A. Manufacturer certificates: Signed by EIFS manufacturer, certifying the following:

1. EIFS complies with requirements. 2. Substrates to which EIFS is indicated to be attached are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.



3. Accessory products installed with EIFS, including joint sealants, flashing, water-resistive barrier coatings, trim, whether or not furnished by EIFS manufacturer and whether or not specified in this Section, are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.

B. Product certificates: For insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.

C. Product test reports: For each EIFS assembly and component, and for water-resistive barrier coatings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


E. Sample warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by AWCI International as qualified to install Class PB EIFS using trained workers.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, to set quality standards for materials and execution, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as selected by Owners Representative. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.

B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes.

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating

materials to Project site before installation time.



3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Proceed with installation of adhesives or coatings only when ambient temperatures have remained, or are forecast to remain, above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after application. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Bond integrity and weathertightness. b. Deterioration of EIFS finishes and other EIFS materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty coverage includes the following components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies:

a. EIFS finish, including base coats, finish coats, and reinforcing mesh. b. Insulation installed as part of EIFS including foam buildouts. c. Insulation adhesive and mechanical fasteners. d. EIFS accessories, including trim components and flashing. e. Water-resistive barrier coatings. f. EIFS drainage components.

3. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





1. BASF Corporation. 2. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 3. Sto Corp.

B. Basis-of-Design EIFS system: Senergy Legacy Wall System, by BASF Corporation.


A. EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E2568 and with the following:

1. Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior, with a means to drain water entering EIFS to the exterior.

2. Impact Performance: ASTM E2568, High impact resistance. 3. Drainage Efficiency: 90 percent average minimum when tested according to

ASTM E2273.

2.3 EIFS MATERIALS

A. Water-Resistive Barrier Coating: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water-resistive barrier coating; compatible with substrate.

1. Water-Resistance: Comply with physical and performance criteria of ASTM E2570/E2570M.

2. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less.

B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt, and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use; specifically formulated to be applied to back side of insulation in a manner that creates open vertical channels designed to serve as an integral part of the water-drainage system of the EIFS-clad drainage-wall assembly; compatible with substrate.


D. Thermal Insulation Layer: Provide insulation recommended by EIFS system manufacturer. Provide buildouts with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.

1. Molded, (Expanded) Rigid Channeled Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM E2430/E2430M. R-Value at time of manufacture = 3.85 per inch for 1.00 pounds/cubic foot density.

E. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in.according to ASTM E2098/E2098M.








F. Base Coat: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture.


G. Water-Resistant Base Coat: EIFS manufacturer's standard water-resistant formulation.


H. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.

1. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less.

I. Finish Coat: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based textured coating with enhanced mildew resistance.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

J. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D1784, manufacturer's standard cell class for use intended, and ASTM C1063.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work.






B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates.

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C1397, ASTM E2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.

B. Water-Resistive Barrier Coating: Apply over sheathing to provide a water-resistive barrier. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over water-resistive barrier coating, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, and terminations. Prime substrates with flashing primer if required and install flashing.

D. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at opening sills, and elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.

E. Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges overlapped and mechanically secured with fasteners over water-resistive barrier coating.

F. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C1397.

1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method, with notches oriented vertically to produce drainage channels that remain functional after the insulation is adhered to substrate.

2. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. Prevent airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.

3. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier coating.

G. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer.

H. Water-Resistant Base Coat: Apply full-thickness coverage to exposed insulation and to exposed surfaces of foam build-outs and to other surfaces indicated on Drawings.



I. Base Coat: Apply full coverage to exposed insulation and foam build-outs with not less than dry-coat thickness recommended by manufacturer.

J. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C1397. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are invisible.

K. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C1397 in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

L. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip-reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip-reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide, strip-reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of corners.

M. Foam Buildouts: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.

N. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

O. Finish Coat: Apply full-thickness coverage over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.

P. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings.



WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Waterproofing membrane (for waterproofing beneath fiber-cement plank, composite cement panel and resin panel rainscreen systems).

2. Flexible flashing.




A. Evaluation Reports: For waterproofing membrane, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Waterproofing Membrane: Prefabricated, 40 mil self-adhering sheet-type waterproofing membrane. The membrane bonds to the substrate and self-seals around nails, staples and other fasteners to prevent damage caused by water penetration. It is intended for use in sub-grade applications, and under siding, exterior plaster, as a through-wall flashing or anywhere it will be protected from ultraviolet exposure.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW 705. b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Permabarrier. c. Soprema, Inc.; Sopraseal Stick 1100.

2. Composition: Multi-layer high-strength polymer film that is coated with a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive.

3. Release Liners: Protect asphalt, removed as membrane is installed.

4. Technical Properties:







a. Tested to ICC-ES AC 38, ICC-ES ESR 3980. b. Tested to ICC-ES AC 148, ICC-ES ESR 2783. c. Complies with AAMA 711-13, Level 2. d. Material Thickness, ASTM D 1970: 40 Mils Nominal. e. Pliability, ICC-ES AC 38: Pass. f. Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96: 0.02 g/m2 Maximum. g. Water Resistance, ASTM D 779: Greater than 30 hours h. Nail Sealability, ASTM D 1970: Pass. i. Tensile MD, ASTM D 882: 21 lbf/in2. j. Tensile CMD, ASTM D 882: 28 lbf/in2. k. Installation Temperature Range: Greater than 50 degrees F. l. Material Color: Black.

B. Adhesive: As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Primer: Asphalt-based commercial primer as recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

A. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a prefabricated, self-adhering, pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch, as recommended by waterproofing membrane Manufacturer.

B. Technical Properties:

1. Installation Temperature Range: Greater than 50 degrees F. 2. Material Color: Black. 3. Material Thickness, ASTM D 1970: 40 Mils Nominal. 4. Flexibility at -20 degrees F, ASTM D 1970: Pass. 5. Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96: 0.08 g/m2 Maximum. 6. Nail Sealability, ASTM D 1970: Pass. 7. Tensile, ASTM D 412: 37 lbf/in2. 8. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 135 percent Minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Inspect and prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving best result for the substrates under project conditions.

B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been prepared using the methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from



manufacturer’s recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer’s recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

3.2 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including the following:

1. Apply in clear, dry weather. 2. Surface must be clean, dry and free from oil. 3. Prime weathered surfaces as necessary - clean, dry, wood and metal surfaces do not

require priming. 4. Use 3 inches side laps and 6 inches head laps. 5. Apply uniform pressure with a 2 to 3 inches hand roller to entire surface. 6. Do not install over solvent-based sealants unless fully cured - active solvents may liquefy

bottom adhesive surface. 7. Test for compatibility with caulks and sealants. 8. Do not install over flexible vinyl gaskets. 9. Do not expose installed product to direct sunlight for more than 90 days.

3.3 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply in clear, dry weather. 2. Surface must be clean, dry and free from oil. Use 3 inches side laps and 6 inches head

laps. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. Do not install over solvent-based sealants unless fully cured - active solvents may liquefy

bottom adhesive surface. 6. Test for compatibility with caulks and sealants. 7. Do not install over flexible vinyl gaskets. 8. Do not expose installed product to direct sunlight for more than 90 days.


A. Protect barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period.

B. Protect barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace barrier exposed for more than 90 days.

C. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



D. Remove masking materials after installation.

E. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 1

SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standing-seam metal roof panels, underlayment, and miscellaneous materials for a complete metal roof installation.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition

of other construction that affect metal panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and

inspections if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after

installation. 9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, hanging and built-in gutters, and accessories; and special details.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.


A. Product test reports.

B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.




A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.



D. Remove strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels according to the following when tested according to CRRC-1:

1. Three-year, aged solar reflectance (SRI) of not less than 59 and emissivity of not less than 0.83.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

C. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

D. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail Resistance: MH.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E1514.



B. Vertical-Rib, Mechanically-Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.


a. ATAS International, Inc. b. Fabral. c. Garland Company, Inc. (The). d. MBCI.

2. Basis-of-Design Standing Seam Metal Roofing System: Field-Lok, by Atas Roofing, Inc.

3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 24 gauge. b. Performance:

1) Impact Rating: Class 4 when tested in accordance with UL 2218. 2) Fire Rating: Class A when tested in accordance with UL 790.

c. Exterior Finish: 55% Al-Zn alloy coated steel with acrylic coating. d. Color: Clear-coated acrylic over galvalume. e. Texture: Smooth.

4. Clips: One-piece fixed clip, and two-piece floating clip to accommodate thermal movement.

a. Material, fixed clip: 0.034-inch-nominal thickness, 22 gauge, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.

b. Material, floating clip: 0.052-inch-nominal thickness, 18-gauge base, and 0.034-inch, 22-gauge top, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.

5. Panel Coverage: 18 inches. 6. Panel Height: 2 3/8 inches.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.








1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D1970. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Carlisle WIP Products; a brand of Carlisle Construction Materials. b. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, a Drexel Metals Company. c. Owens Corning.

B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226/D226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.

C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792, Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Gutters and Downspouts: See Section 077100 “Roof Specialties” for gutters and downspouts.

E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.

F. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.







2. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C1311.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Acrylic Finish: Galvalume PlusTM; Manufacturer’s clear, water-based organic coating. 2. Concealed Finish: Same finish as exposed side of panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.



a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment): Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

1. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap over edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 6 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water.

C. Slip Sheet: Where required by roof panel manufacturer, apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

D. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool

so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.



4. Watertight Installation:

a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.

b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

B. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

C. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

D. Gutters and Downspouts: See Section 077100 “Roof Specialties for gutters and downspouts installation.

E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 ft. on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.




A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074113.16


SOFFIT PANELS 074293 - 1

SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal soffit panels.





B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.



B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.





B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.



C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof eave and soffit as shown on Drawings; approximately four panels wide by full eave width, including attachments and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.02 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 4.0 lbf/sq. ft..

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and a flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.





a. Berridge Manufacturing Company. b. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. c. Dimensional Metals, Inc.

2. Material: Same material and finish as metal roof panels. 3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch. b. Exterior Finish: 55% Al-Zn alloy coated steel with acrylic coating. c. Color: Clear-coated acrylic over galvalume.

4. Panel Coverage: 12 inches (nominal). 5. Panel Height: 1 inch.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements






demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Acrylic Finish: Galvalume PlusTM; Manufacturer’s clear, water-based organic coating. 2. Concealed Finish: Same finish as exposed side of panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Metal Soffit Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of metal panels. 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.



4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

B. Watertight Installation:

1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and

fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.



FIBER-CEMENT, CONCRETE AND RESIN SIDING 074646 - 1

SECTION 074646 - FIBER-CEMENT, CONCRETE AND RESIN SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Composite Concrete Panels, Fiber Cement Plank and Resin Panel.



B. Samples: For fiber-cement siding, mounting system and related accessories.


A. Product certificates.


C. Research/evaluation reports.

D. Sample warranty.




A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBER-CEMENT PLANK (TRIM BOARDS as SIDING/FENCING)

A. General: ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84.


a. American Fiber Cement Corporation. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. GAF. d. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.

B. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch.

D. Horizontal Pattern: Trim Boards 5-1/2 inches wide in plain style.

1. Texture: Smooth.

E. Fasteners:

1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.

2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate.

3. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.

F. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish and full range of colors with matching pre-finished fasteners.

1. Process:

a. Factory applied finish by fiber cement manufacturer in a controlled environment within the fiber cement manufacturer's own facility utilizing a multi-coat, heat cured finish within one manufacturing process.

b. Each finish color must have documented color match to delta E of 0.5 or better between product lines, manufacturing lots or production runs as measured by photospectrometer and verified by third party.








2. Protection: Factory applied finish protection such as plastic laminate that is removed once siding is installed

a. Accessories: Complete finishing system includes pre-packaged touch-up kit provided by fiber cement manufacturer. Provide quantities as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Finish Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing finish defects.

1. 15 years from the date of substantial completion: will not peel; will not crack; and will not chip. Finish warranty to include coverage for labor and material.

2.2 COMPOSITE CEMENT PANEL SIDING

A. Basis of Design: Cemfort Xpression Color with Cem-Screw fastening system.

1. Real Concrete by Cemfort Panels, (450) 373-0455 www.cemforthd.com 2. Or acceptable equals by the following:

a. Rieder North America b. Taktl

B. Thermally Isolated Subframing:

1. Needs to be at least 18-gauge, minimal face width of 50 mm (2 in) to receive the panels, maximum length according to the dimensions noted in the plans.

2. The total assembly needs to allow a maximum refraction of L/360.

3. Galvanised by hot-dip process according to the standard ASTM-A525 (G90) or ZAM coated.

C. Mechanical Attachments: Self drilling stainless steel screw, with ‘wafer head’ design, grade # 10, 37mm long, provided by the system manufacturer. Pre-painted with same color and quality product than panel (see section 2.1 – D), by Cemfort Panels Inc.

D. Ventilation grill: 24-gauge caliber metal ventilation grill specific to the system, of 13mm x 64mm, pre-painted, provided by the system manufacturer.

E. Fiber Cement Panels meeting the following requirements:

1. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of available colors 2. Thickness: 12mm 3. Density: + 1,600 kg/m3 (+ 5.4 lb/in3) 4. Manufacturing tolerance: Length and width: ± 3 mm Thickness: ± 1.5 mm Squareness: -

1 mm/m 5. Humidified deflection: 1/588 of span 6. Dimensional change (due to moisture): 0.15%



7. Compression resistance (Head screw): 950 N 8. Flexural strength: 12 mm (1/2”) + 15 Mpa (2,175 psi) 9. Minimal fastener pull resistance: 12 mm: + 4,000N (932 lb) 10. Freeze-Thaw resistance (200 cycles): No loss to mass 11. Impact resistance: ASTM D 1037 ...................................... Passed 12. ASTM A 118.9 (height: 475 mm (19”) ............................... Passed 13. Thermal expansion: ASTM C 531 1.2 x 10-5 mm/mm C (6.7 x 10-6 po. /po. F) 14. Surface burning resistance: ULC-S 102.M - Flame spread............................ 0

2.3 RESIN PANEL SIDING

A. The specifications are based on FunderMax Max Compact Exterior F Quality high pressure phenolic rainscreen wall panels manufactured by FunderMax GmbH, FunderMax North America.

1. Basis of Design: FunderMax Max Compact Exterior F Quality 2. Alternate Products:

a. CEI Composites b. AMD

B. Product Description:

1. Fire-retardant solid phenolic panels with standard brown core comprised of kraft paper harvested from FSC certified forests and thermosetting resins. Dry Formed (DF) or Natural Fiber Core (NFC) products will not be accepted.

2. Acceptable alternate products must be manufactured using a high-pressure laminate press process that meet all requirements of the EN 438-4 standard and may not be manufactured as a low-pressure lamination to a phenolic core.

3. Panel Decor: (Unicolours) or (Material) 4. As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard color range 5. Rainscreen Panel Surface: NT 6. Rainscreen Panel Core: Brown 7. Rainscreen Panel Thickness: 8mm

C. Panel Module for finished installation: As indicated on the architectural drawings

D. Rainscreen Substructure: (Exposed Fastener Type) thermally isolated extruded profiles, clips, and closures as indicated on the architectural drawings

E. Panels shall be specifically designed for exterior rainscreen wall applications. Fabricated panels shall comply with all current codes and regulations for the Project. Panels shall have uniform thickness (+0.03”) and flatness (maximum difference of 0.03”) for a 10-foot span.

F. Flame Spread: Panels to conform to ASTM E-84 for Class A fire rating with a Flame spread index of less than 10 and Smoke development index of less than 450.

G. NFPA-268 Surface Ignition test, pass.



H. Ignition Temperature: Greater than 650 degrees Fahrenheit above ambient, ASTM D-1929

I. UV stable surface of Acrylic-PUR resin coating of 100-micron thickness or greater with color stability > 4 on Gray Scale.

J. Performance Requirements:

1. Modulus of Elasticity: 1,300,000-psi minimum. 2. Weight: 8mm 2.4 lbs./SF 3. Tensile Strength: 11,000-PSI, minimum. 4. Flexural Strength: 13,000-PSI, minimum. 5. Surface Impact Resistance: < 8 per EN ISO 178 6. Scratch Resistance: > 3 /4 N per EN 438:6 7. Optical Properties: Color Stability Gray Scale > 4 per ISO 4892-2, 4892-3. 8. Panels shall be hail impact resistant with no breakage per Austrian APBIC Standard,

Association of Public Building Insurance Companies. Equivalent test standard 70mm ice ball at a velocity of 30 meters/second (approx. 67 mph) without breakage, tearing or discoloration.

9. Panels shall be FSC Certified 10. Panels shall have an Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) Report.

K. Panel Tolerance:

1. Thickness: 1/32”, maximum. 2. Non-porous surface and edges which do not require sealing after cutting or drilling.

2.4 RAINSCREEN ATTACHMENT/SUPPORT FRAMING SYSTEM – PAVILION AND BATHHOUSE

A. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2010 definition of continuous insulation (c.i.).

B. Coating Material: ASTM A1046, Zinc-Aluminum-Magnesium, minimum thickness ZM40.

C. ASTM A653 Galvanized steel is not acceptable.

D. Steel Classification: Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, 50 ksi Yield.

E. Spacing: Comply with manufacturer’s Professional Engineer’s calculations.

F. Horizontal Girt: Stiffened horizontal girt with pre-punched drainage holes, directly attached on top of rigid insulation [directly to substrate] at regular spacing, with engineered thermally isolated washer assembly and fasteners.

1. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.046-inch thick (18 gauge). 2. Profile Depth: 0.75 inches. 3. Girt Fastening Face: 2-inches. 4. Overall Girt Profile: 5-1/8-inches. 5. Basis of Design: HCI™ by Knight Wall Systems or approved equal.



G. Secondary Vertical Rail: Nominal 0.046-inch-thick (18 gauge) cold-formed steel.

1. Profile: Hat channel with stiffening lips. 2. Profile Depth: 0.75 inches. 3. Girt Fastening Face: 2.0 inches. 4. Weep Drains: 0.75 inches diameter at 4 inches on center along flanges to allow for free

air flow laterally. 5. Attachment Holes: Locate at 2 inches on center along back to facilitate number 14 self-

drilling self-tapping screw attachment to primary rail. 6. Oversize holes to allow for thermal contraction and expansion of rail. 7. Basis of Design: PanelRail™ by Knight Wall Systems or approved equal.

H. Fasteners:

1. Sufficient length to provide solid attachment through rigid insulation to structure as required by manufacturer.

2. Thermal Isolating Washers: Minimum 0.125-inch-thick Polyoxymethylene copolymer (POM) washers with integral centering lip to act as a thermal break between wall anchor fasteners and girt.

3. Tensile Yield Strength: 9.57 ksi per ISO 527. 4. Melting Temperature: 329 degrees Fahrenheit per ISO 3146. 5. Basis of Design: ThermaStop™ Isolator by Knight Wall Systems or approved equal.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

B. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: High-performance organic finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.



B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.



ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof-edge specialties – roof edge fascia. 2. Roof-edge drainage systems – gutters and downspouts. 3. Built-in gutters.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system manufacturer's representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.



B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Sample warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.





A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Section 074113.16 "Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels."

B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that



resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES

A. Roof-Edge Fascia: Formed, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous metal receiver with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching corner units.

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. Nominal 22-gauge, 0.0299-inch thickness.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. b. Acrylic Finish: GalvalumePlusTM; Manufacturer's standard clear, water-based

organic coating on both sides

2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- wide, concealed backup plate. 3. Fascia Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats; Soffit trim.

2.3 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS


1. ATAS International, Inc. 2. Metal-Era, Inc. 3. Perimeter Systems; a division of SAF.

B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.040 inch thick. 2. Gutter Profile: As indicated according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual." 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Gutter Supports: Manufacturer's standard supports as selected by Architect with finish

matching the gutters. 5. Gutter Accessories: Bronze wire ball downspout strainer.







C. Downspouts: Plain round complete with machine-crimped elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

D. Aluminum Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.


A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Coil-Coated Aluminum Sheet Finishes:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.



2.7 BUILT-IN GUTTERS

A. Single-ply Membrane, fully-adhered: EPDM sheet, ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced, EPDM sheet.


a. Firestone Building Products. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Versico Roofing Systems.

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 4. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch-

wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. 6. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match

membrane roofing. 7. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with

corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and roof edges for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.







1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES

A. Install cleats and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM

A. Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.



B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 19 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.

D. Splash Blocks: Install precast concrete splash blocks where downspouts discharge onto finished grade.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BUILT-IN GUTTERS

A. Adhere single-ply membrane over areas indicated according to membrane manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Unroll membrane and allow to relax before installing.

C. Accurately align membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice area of roof membrane.

E. Apply membrane with side laps shingled with slope of gutter.

F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape.

1. Firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof membrane to ensure a watertight seam installation.

2. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in membrane that do not comply with requirements.

H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over downspout inlet tube flange.

I. Protect built-in gutter system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

J. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by membrane manufacturer of affected construction. Remove all debris and foreign objects from built-in gutter at the time of Substantial Completion.




A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 1

SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rail-type, seam-mounted snow guards.



B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing layouts and attachment details of snow guards.

1. Include details of rail-type snow guards.

C. Samples:

1. Rail-Type Snow Guards: Bracket, 12-inch- long rail, and installation hardware.

a. For units with factory-applied finishes, submit manufacturer's standard color selections.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of snow guard, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating load at failure of attachment to roof system identical to roof system used on this Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Structural Performance: Snow guards shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.



1. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 RAIL-TYPE SNOW GUARDS

A. Rail-Type, Seam-Mounted Snow Guards:


a. Alpine SnowGuards, a division of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. b. Berger Building Products, Inc. c. S-5! Attachment Solutions; Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd.

2. Basis of Design: ColorGard, by S-5! Attachment Solutions; Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd. 3. Description: Snow guard rails fabricated from metal bars or extrusions, anchored to

brackets and equipped with a single fence. 4. Brackets and Baseplates: ASTM B209 aluminum; mill finish. 5. Bars: ASTM B221M, aluminum; mill finish.

a. Profile: Square with integral track to accept color-matching inserts of material and finish used for metal roof. Inserts may be omitted from system where color of roofing and the mill finish aluminum bars’ color are a close match.

b. Provide snap-on clips to be attached to bottom bar at each panel prevent snow migration beneath bottom bar.

6. Seam clamps: ASTM B221 aluminum extrusion or ASTM B85/B85M aluminum casting with stainless steel set screws incorporating round nonpenetrating point; designed for use with applicable roofing system to which clamp is attached.

a. Provide adjustable clamp assembly that permits rails to be installed at a non-perpendicular angle to standing seam, as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, snow guard attachment, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.








3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install snow guards according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Space rows as indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Attachment for Standing-Seam Metal Roofing:

1. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roofing or fastening methods that void metal roofing finish warranty.

2. Rail-Type, Seam-Mounted Snow Guards:

a. Install brackets to vertical ribs in straight rows. b. Secure with stainless steel set screws, incorporating round nonpenetrating point, on

same side of standing seam. c. Torque set screw according to manufacturer's instructions. d. Install cross members to brackets.






PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.






A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been

installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using

natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.






1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other

gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration

firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming

openings, and with penetrating items if any.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products.

b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

c. Hilti, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.

D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less

than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting

agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.










2. Substrate primers.

3. Collars.

4. Steel sleeves.

2.2 FILL MATERIALS

A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during

exposure to moisture.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents

or inorganic fibers.

E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil

on one side.

F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,

fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a

nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant

additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect

pillows/bags from being easily removed.

H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.







3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings

immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following

requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials

that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable

of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose

particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths

required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of

firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and

penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with

requirements.

B. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.







A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that

penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out

and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials

to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, C-BK, W-L- 1001-1999.

2. F-Rating: 2 hours.

3. T-Rating: 2 hours.

4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

C. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Electrical Cables:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- W-K- W-L- 3001-3999.


3. T-Rating: 2 hours.


D. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Insulated Pipes:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- W-J- W-L- W-N- 5001-5999.


3. T-Rating: 1 hour Insert number of hours.




JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Non-staining silicone joint sealants. 3. Urethane joint sealants. 4. Immersible joint sealants. 5. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 6. Butyl joint sealants. 7. Latex joint sealants.




A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.



B. Preconstruction laboratory test reports.

C. Preconstruction field-adhesion-test reports.

D. Field-adhesion-test reports.

E. Sample warranties.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials.

3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with E.I.F.S. substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.




B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 NON-STAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Non-staining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C1248.

B. Silicone, Non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT: Non-staining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.


a. Pecora Corporation. b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. c. Tremco Incorporated.







2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.


a. Pecora Corporation. b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.4 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Immersible Joint Sealants. Suitable for immersion in liquids; ASTM C1247; tested in deionized water unless otherwise indicated

B. Urethane, Immersible, M, NS, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. LymTal International Inc. b. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated.














2.6 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C1311.


a. Bostik, Inc. b. Pecora Corporation.

2.7 Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.


a. Alcot Plastics Ltd. b. BASF Corporation. c. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.














B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:



1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints in spray park decks.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, immersible, M, NS, 50, T, NT, I. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between GFRC units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT . 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry.



2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

G. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

H. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Sill plates. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.


1. Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.





B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.



C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.



B. Field quality control reports.


A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses.


A. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of egress door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following:


A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Republic Doors and Frames.






3. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.


2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Kraft-paper honeycomb.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded.

2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A..

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A60 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material

as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same

material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.




g. Core: Polyurethane.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.

C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.



G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.

D. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames.

4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.



2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.

2. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout or mortar. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.



1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Inspections:

1. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements according to NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.

C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

3.4 REPAIR

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Five-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:

1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door louvers. 5. Factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and

glazing thicknesses. 3. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 4. Clearances and undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Field quality-control reports.




A. Special warranties.


A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or WI's Certified Compliance Program.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: In accordance with their Limited Lifetime Warranty, the Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A.



1. Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

C. Composite Wood Products: Verify products are made without added urea formaldehyde.

2.2 SOLID-CORE, FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Doors:


a. Eggers Industries. b. Lambton Doors. c. Masonite Architectural. d. Oshkosh Door Company. e. VT Industries Inc.

2. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty. 3. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Custom. 4. Faces: Single-plywood veneer not less than 1/50 inch thick.

a. Species: Select white birch. b. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). c. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. e. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each

separate room or area of building.

5. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces and covering edges of faces - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type B.

6. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors:

a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 particleboard.

1) Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

7. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

8. Security Rating: Class 40.











2.3 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.

1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA-

156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.

1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A TR-8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester/Urethane 3. Staining: None required. 4. Sheen: Satin.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."

B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors:

1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below.

a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.

2. Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances:

a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering

unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

5. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.


A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Inspections:



1. Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program, certifying that wood doors and frames, including installation, comply with requirements of AWI/AWMCA/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for the specified grade.

C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for ceilings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes

B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified.

C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:


a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Milcor; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. c. Nystrom.

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 3. Door Size: As indicated on drawings. 4. Locations: Gypsum board ceilings. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gauge, factory primed. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, key operated.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.







B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

B. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

C. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.




A. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

B. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Aluminum-framed storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed entrance door systems.





B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

2. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.


A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer.

B. Product test reports. For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Source quality-control reports.


E. Sample warranties.







B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer.

B. Special Finish Warranty, Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of baked-enamel, powder-coat, or organic finishes within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.



1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. as defined in AAMA 501.

F. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor):

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U-factor for the system of not more than 0.32 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to AAMA 1503, based upon 1”



clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

b. Entrance Doors: U-factor of not more than 0.52 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100, based upon 1” clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC):

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.

b. Entrance Doors: SHGC of not more than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Air Leakage:

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: Air leakage for the system of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E283.

b. Entrance Doors: Air leakage of not more than 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

4. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF):

a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: CRF for the system of not less than 68 (frame) and 68 (glass) as determined according to AAMA 1503, based upon 1” clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

b. Entrance Doors: CRF of not less than 37 (frame) and 66 (glass) as determined according to AAMA 1503, based upon 1” clear insulating glass (1/4" clear with e= 0.035 Low-E coating on #2 surface, 1/2" as with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas-fill, 1/4" clear).

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS


1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company. 3. Tubelite Inc.







B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Finish: High-performance organic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS



B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.







2.4 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS



B. Basis of Design: Trifab 400 Framing System, by Kawneer North America, an Arconic Company.

C. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Verify sealant has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.

B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.

D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.

E. Steel Reinforcement:








1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

F. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.



1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not install damaged components.

C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

G. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.

I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING

A. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS

A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.



2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

1. Air Leakage: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, whichever is greater.

a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.

2. Water Penetration: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum-framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.



ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum horizontal-sliding windows for exterior locations.


1. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units.

2. Section 088000 “Glazing” for insulating glass requirements.



1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified.





B. Sample warranties.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Window Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Air Infiltration Test:

1. With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf .

2. Air infiltration shall not exceed .30 cfm/SF of unit.

C. Water Resistance Test:

1. With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331/ASTM E 547 at a static air pressure difference of 12.0 psf.

2. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage.

D. Uniform Load Deflection Test:

1. With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of 50.0 psf, positive and negative pressure.

2. No member shall deflect over L/175 of its span.

E. Uniform Load Structural Test:

1. With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of 75.0 psf, both positive and negative.



2. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage that would cause the window to be inoperable.

F. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: AW. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 50. 3. AAMA Rating: AA-PG50.

G. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.44 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

H. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.40.

I. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF(frame) of 63.

J. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.

2.2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS


1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Apogee Wausau Group, Inc. 3. Winco Manufacturing Co.

B. Type: Horizontal Sliding.

C. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames and sashes with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

D. Insulating-Glass Units: See Section 088000, “Glazing.”







E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.

F. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Horizontal-Sliding Window Hardware:

1. Sill Cap/Track: Designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior.

2. Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only. 3. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.

H. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

I. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings.

B. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

C. Panning Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings.

D. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum receptor system that anchors windows in place.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.

D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.



E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration.

F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.


A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112.



B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

E. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.



DOOR HARDWARE 087111 - 1

SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.



B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security

systems.

C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified.

D. Door hardware schedule.

E. Keying schedule.


A. Sample warranty.




A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during



the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

B. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.

2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. Lawrence Hardware Inc.

B. Plain-Bearing Hinges: Grade 3 (standard weight).

1. Mounting: Full mortise (butts). 2. Base and Pin Metal: Steel with steel pin. 3. Pins: Non-rising loose unless otherwise indicated.







4. Tips: Flat button. 5. Corners: 5/32-inch radius.

2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch-thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.

B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Grade: 1-300. 3. Mounting: Concealed leaf.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Cast.

a. Equal to Schlage Athens. b. Construction: Solid.

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.







1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.


a. Allegion plc. b. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Hager Companies.

2.5 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

2. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. 3. Material: Zinc alloy. 4. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by key outside, no trim inside.

2.6 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS

A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising into door edge.


a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Allegion plc. c. Door Controls International, Inc.

B. Manual-Extension Flush Bolts: Grade 1, fabricated from extruded brass or aluminum, with 12-inch rod actuated by flat lever.

1. Strike: Matching.

C. Top-Bolt Extension Rod Length: As required to locate operating mechanism at not more than 72 inches above the finished floor at all times.















2.7 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

C. Rim Exit Devices: Grade 1.

1. Type: 1, rim. 2. Actuating Bar: Push pad. 3. Material: Aluminum.

D. Concealed Vertical-Cable Exit Devices: Grade 1.

1. Type: 8, for metal doors. 2. Actuating Bar: Push pad. 3. Material: Aluminum. 4. Configuration: Top and bottom cables.

E. Exit Device Outside Trim: Pull, or Thumb turn with cylinder, as indicated; material and finish to match locksets unless otherwise indicated.

1. Match design for lock trim unless otherwise indicated.

F. Through-Bolt Fasteners: For exit devices and trim on metal doors.

2.8 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.


a. Allegion plc. b. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Hager Companies. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

B. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.












C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.9 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate cylinders.

a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five each of master and grand master keys.

2. Existing System:

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.

3. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2.10 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

B. Flat Push Plates: With square corners and beveled edges; secured with exposed screws.

1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. 2. Size: 4 inches wide by 16 inches high.

C. Offset Door Pulls: 1-inch constant-diameter pull.

1. Mounting: Through bolted with oval-head machine screws and countersunk washers. 2. Offset: 2 inches.







3. Minimum Clearance: 2-1/4 inches from face of door. 4. Overall Length: 10 inches.

D. Single Push Bar: Horizontal-bar type.

1. Mounting: Through bolted with oval-head machine screws and countersunk washers. 2. Shape and Size: 1-inch constant-diameter round bar. 3. Minimum Clearance: 1-1/2 inches from face of door.

2.11 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. Allegion plc. b. DORMA USA, Inc. c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

B. Surface Closer with Cover: Grade 1; Modern type with mechanism enclosed in cover.

1. Mounting: Opposite hinge side Parallel arm. 2. Type: Regular arm, Dead stop, or Dead stop hold open as scheduled. 3. Backcheck: Adjustable, effective between 60 and 85 degrees of door opening. 4. Cover Material: Aluminum. 5. Closing Power Adjustment: At least 35 percent more than minimum tested value.

2.12 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.



2. Installation: Expansion-shield installation.











2.13 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.


a. Allegion plc. b. DORMA USA, Inc. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.

B. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Nonfriction Slide Stops: Type 5; Grade 1; with nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.

C. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Nonfriction Slide Holders: Type 5; Grade 1; with nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure, automatic hold-open, and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.

2.14 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.

B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg, as follows: 1. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening. 2. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per foot of door opening.

C. Rigid, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Sponge neoprene gasket material held in place by housing; fastened to frame stop with screws.

1. Housing Material: Aluminum.

D. Door Sweeps: Neoprene gasket material held in place by flat housing or flange; surface mounted to face of door with screws.

1. Housing or Flange Material: Aluminum.











2.15 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.


a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.

B. Plate Thresholds: Solid metal plate.

1. Top Surface: Fluted with slip-resistant abrasive. 2. Base Metal: Aluminum.

2.16 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch-thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.



B. Kick Plates: 10 inches high by door width with allowance for frame stops.

C. Mop Plates: 6 inches high by 1 inch less than door width.

2.17 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated below, or as otherwise indicated in door hardware schedule. 1. US26D (626)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.











2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

3.4 HARDWARE SETS

A. SET 1

2 Continuous Hinges 2 Exit Devices -Concealed Vertical Cable 1 Exit Device Exterior Thumbturn Trim with Cylinder 2 1” Diameter Offset Pulls, 10” long 2 Closers Cush-n-Stop 1 Set Perimeter Weather Seals



1 Set Manufacturer’s Standard Meeting Stile Weatherstrip 2 Door Sweep Strip 1 Threshold

B. SET 2

2 Continuous Hinges 2 Exit Devices -Concealed Vertical Cable 1 Exit Device Exterior Thumbturn Trim with Cylinder 2 1” Diameter Offset Pulls, 10” long 2 Closers Cush-n-Stop

C. SET 3

2 Continuous Hinges 2 1” Diameter Offset Pulls, 10” long 2 1” Diameter Push Bars 2 Closers Cush-n-Stop

D. SET 4

1 Continuous Hinges 1 Exit Devices -Rim Mounted 1 1” Diameter Offset Pull, 10” long 1 Closer Cush-n-Stop 1 Set Perimeter Weather Seals 1 Door Sweep Strip 1 Threshold

E. SET 5

1 ½ Pr Hinges 1 Lockset – Storeroom Function F86 1 Wall stop

F. SET 6

1 ½ Pr Hinges 1 Passage Set 1 Wall stop

G. SET 7

1 ½ Pr Hinges NRP 1 Lockset Classroom Function F84 1 Closer Cush-n-Stop 1 Set Perimeter Weather Seals 1 Door Sweep Strip



1 Threshold

H. SET 8

1 ½ Pr Hinges 1 Lockset Privacy Function F76 1 Closers Cush-n-Stop 1 Mop Plate 1 Kick Plate

I. SET 9

1 ½ Pr Hinges 1set Push Plate / Pull 1 Closer Cush-n-Stop 1 Deadbolt with Cylinder

J. SET 10

1 ½ Pr Hinges NRP 1 Lockset Storeroom Function F86 1 Set Perimeter Weather Seals 1 Door Sweep Strip 1 Overhead Stop with Hold Open

K. SET 11

3 Prs Hinges NRP 1 Lockset Classroom Function F84 1 Set Manual Flush Bolts 1 Set Perimeter Weather Seals 2 Door Sweep Strip 1 Overhead Stop with Hold Open

L. SET 12

1 Continuous Hinge 1 1” Diameter Offset Pull 10” long 1 1” Diameter Push Bar 1 Closer Cush-n-Stop 1 Deadbolt with Cylinder

M. SET 13

1 set Manufacturer’s Standard Hardware Locking Mechanism 1 Cylinder


AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 1

SECTION 087113 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Low-energy door operators for swinging doors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.



B. Shop Drawings: For automatic door operators.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.








A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATORS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Horton Automatics; a division of Overhead Door Corporation; 4100 LN. 2. LCN; an Allegion brand; LCN 9542.

2.2 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for occupancy type indicated; and in accordance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation and safety devices. 1. Wind Load: Provide door operators on exterior doors that will open and close doors and

maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to wind load.

B. Electromechanical Operating System: Self-contained unit powered by permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor, connections for power and activation- and safety-device wiring, and manual operation, including spring closing when power is off.

C. Housing for Overhead Concealed Operators: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded or formed aluminum and extending full width of door opening, including door jambs, to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.

D. Cover for Surface-Mounted Operators: Fabricated from 0.125-inch- thick, extruded or formed aluminum; manufacturer's standard width; with enclosed end caps, provision for maintenance access, and fasteners concealed when door is in closed position.

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Fabricated from aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.






2.3 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS FOR SWINGING DOORS

A. Standard: BHMA A156.19.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door.

2. Entrapment-Prevention Force: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.

C. Configuration: Operator to control single swinging door.

1. Traffic Pattern: One way. 2. Operator Mounting: Surface.

D. Operating System: Electromechanical.

E. Activation Device: Push-plate switch on each side of door to activate door operator.

F. Exposed Finish: Finish matching door hardware.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Extrusions: ASTM B221. 2. Sheet: ASTM B209.

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.5 CONTROLS

A. General: Provide controls in accordance with BHMA standards; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for occupancy type indicated. Coordinate devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms.

B. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact door control switch with flat push-plate actuator with contrasting-colored, engraved message.

1. Configuration: Round push plate with 4-by-4-inch junction box.

a. Mounting: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall.



2. Configuration: Rectangular push plate with 2-by-4-inch junction box.

a. Mounting: Surface mounted on post.

3. Push-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open."

C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard for type of door and its operation.

1. Application Process: Operator manufacturer's standard process. 2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application when operators are installed.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Factory fabricate automatic door operators to comply with indicated standards.

B. Fabricate exterior components to drain condensation and water-passing joints within operator enclosure to the exterior.

C. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match operator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install automatic door operators in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for type of door operation and direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, remote power units if any, and connection to building's power supply.

B. Controls: Install devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for operator type and direction of pedestrian travel.

C. Signage: Apply on both sides of each door as required by cited BHMA standard for type of door operator and direction of pedestrian travel.

D. Adjusting: Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards.

1. Adjust operators on exterior doors for tight closure.



2. Readjust automatic door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).

E. Demonstration: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test and inspect each automatic door operator installation, using AAADM inspection forms, to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.

B. Automatic door operators will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Glass products. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Glazing sealants. 4. Glazing tapes. 5. Miscellaneous glazing materials. 6. Insulated Spandrel Panels.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.





B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Product Certificates: For glass.


C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

D. Sample warranties.


A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential

shading within individual glass lites.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


GLAZING 088000 - 3

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 7 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

2. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 7 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. NGA Publications: "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped

Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.


GLAZING 088000 - 4


a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. b. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. c. Pilkington North America.

B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.


a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. b. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. c. Pilkington North America.

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

D. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

E. Low-E-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C1376.


a. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. b. Pilkington North America. c. Viracon, Inc.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Technoform.
















GLAZING 088000 - 5

2) Thermix; a brand of Ensinger USA.

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of industry colors.

B. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant, Class 50: Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.


a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Sika Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.







GLAZING 088000 - 6

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B. Setting Blocks:

1. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

C. Spacers:


D. Edge Blocks:


E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.8 INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS


1. Citadel architectural Products. 2. Mapes Industries, Inc. 3. Nudo, A Verzatec Company

B. Basis-of-Design Panel: Mapes-R+ (5-Ply) panels as manufactured by Mapes Industries, Inc.

C. Finish:

1. Exterior: Custom Kynar 2. Interior: Embossed Baked Enamel 3. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.

D. Panel Fabrication:

1. Exterior Substrate: Impact Layer 2. Core: Isocyanurate 3. Interior Substrate: Solid Plastic (SPS) 4. Tolerances - .8% of panels dimension length and width - (+/-) 1/16" thickness 5. Panel Thickness - 1" 6. R-Value - 5.88 7. U-Value - 0.17

E. Accessories:




GLAZING 088000 - 7

1. As recommended for use as an infill panel component in storefront systems. Related material to complete installation as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Seals against moisture intrusion as recommended by the manufacturer. Polyurethane and silicone based sealant with a 20 year life as recommended by the panel Manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


GLAZING 088000 - 9


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Clear Glass Type (Door Vision Lites and Interior Storefront Systems): Fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch thick. 2. Safety glazing required.

B. Tinted Glass Type: Heat-strengthened and Fully tempered float glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian Glass, SunGuard SuperNeutral, SN 68 CrystalGray; light gray appearance.

2. Tint Color: Light gray. 3. Minimum Thickness: As determined by Delegated Design Engineer. 4. Safety glazing required, as indicated.

3.7 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Low-E-Coated, Tinted Insulating Glass Type 1 (All insulating glass, unless noted otherwise):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian Glass, SunGuard SuperNeutral, SN 68 CrystalGray (Outboard), Clear (Inboard); light gray appearance.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: As determined by Delegated Design Engineer.. 4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 5. Tint Color: Light gray. 6. Interspace Content: Argon. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface. 9. Solar Control: 0.38 SHGC. 10. Safety glazing required.


GLAZING 088000 - 10

B. Low-E-Coated, Tinted Insulating Glass Type 2 (Transom glass over doors, and glazing band over insulated glazing panels):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian Glass, SunGuard SuperNeutral, SN 68 CrystalGray (Outboard), Clear (Inboard); light gray appearance.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: As determined by Delegated Design Engineer. 4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted heat-strengthened float glass. 5. Tint Color: Light gray. 6. Interspace Content: Argon. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface. 9. Solar Control: 0.38 SHGC. 10. Safety glazing not required.



OPERABLE WALL LOUVERS 089116 - 1

SECTION 089116 - OPERABLE WALL LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes operable, extruded-aluminum louvers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for motorized operable louvers.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M. 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M. 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures to the face of the building shall be considered to act normal.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

B. Seismic Performance: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

D. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated louvers that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.

2.2 OPERABLE EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Louver Construction and Operation: Provide operable louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and blades of not less than 0.080-inch nominal thickness, and with operating mechanisms to suit louver sizes. 1. Motor operation with two-direction, 110-V, 60-Hz motor and limit switches; equipped

with terminals for controlling devices.

B. Single-Blade Operable Louver: L-1 & L-2


a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Reliable Products, Inc. c. Ruskin Company.

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 3. Blade Type: Drainable. 4. Accessories: Equip louvers as follows:

a. Vinyl blade-edge gaskets for each louver blade.

5. Louver Performance Ratings:







a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch-high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm. c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 500-fpm 700-

fpm free-area velocity. d. Air Leakage: Not more than 3.5 cfm/sq. ft. of louver gross area at a differential

static pressure of 0.15-inch wg with operable louver blades closed.

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.3 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver, except omit screens where screens are furnished with an accompanying fixed louver.

1. Screen Location: Exterior face unless otherwise indicated. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening.

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.

C. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.

C. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless-steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.



B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.6 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of oil and other contaminants. Use cleaning methods that do not leave residue. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint, complying with SSPC-Paint 20, to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

D. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Test operable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.

B. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.



FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1

SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fixed extruded-aluminum louvers.


1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

B. Seismic Performance: As indicated on drawings.

2.2 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver: L-3


a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Reliable Products, Inc. c. Ruskin Company.

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than 8.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch-high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm. c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 800-fpm free-

area exhaust velocity. d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 1000-fpm

free-area exhaust velocity.

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.3 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.







1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening.

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.

C. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from stainless-steel components, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat



and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

D. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum sheathing board. 3. Tile backing panels.



1. Gypsum wallboard. 2. Gypsum ceiling board. 3. Abuse-resistant gypsum board. 4. Impact-resistant gypsum board. 5. Glass-mat gypsum sheathing board. 6. Glass-mat, water-resistant backing board. 7. Interior trim. 8. Joint treatment materials. 9. Sound-attenuation blankets. 10. Acoustical sealant.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396/C1396M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M.



2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.











C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: For use on all interior partitions. ASTM C1396/C1396M gypsum board, tested according to ASTM C1629/C1629M.



2. Core: 5/8 inch, regular type. 3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 4. Indentation: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 6. Long Edges: Tapered. 7. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.



2. Core: 5/8 inch, moisture-resistant type.

2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C1178/C1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.



2. Core: Thickness as indicated on Drawings, regular type.















3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.



2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

F. Drainage Material: As specified in Section 072500 "Weather Barriers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.



3. Level 3: Ice Building. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

H. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Glazed wall tile. 2. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for glass-mat, water-resistant backer board.



B. Samples:

1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and

composition of tile and for each color and finish required.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

B. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.




A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of wall tile installation. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed wall tile.




a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. b. Daltile. c. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

2. Module Size:

a. Restrooms 104, 105, 106 & 107: 6 by 6 inches. b. Café/Service Area: 4 by 12 inches.

3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. 6. Finish:

a. Restrooms 104, 105, 106 & 107: Matte, opaque glaze. b. Café/Service Area: Bright, opaque glaze.

7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Mounting: Factory, back mounted, as recommended by manufacturer.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.


a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. c. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.

2.4 GROUT MATERIALS

A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. Unsanded.


a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.













b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. c. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.


A. Metal Edge Strips:


a. Blanke Corporation. b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. c. Schluter Systems L.P.

2. Cove Base: Anodized aluminum profile with single integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg and dovetailed channel, connected at a 90 degree angle by a cove-shaped 3/8" radius section that forms the visible surface.

a. Corners: Provide with matching end caps. b. Material and Finish: Satin nickel anodized aluminum. c. Height: As required. d. Basis of Design: Dilex AHKA Trim, by Schluter Systems L.P.

3. Top and End Cap: L-shaped profile with 1/8" wide top section and vertical wall section that together form the visible surface, integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer.

a. Anchoring Leg: Provide with straight anchoring leg b. Material and Finish: Satin nickel anodized aluminum. c. Height: As required. d. Basis of Design: Jolly Trim, by Schluter Systems L.P.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other









substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

G. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated.

3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:



1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: High-performance unsanded grout.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. 2. Sound absorption ceiling panels.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.







A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.



B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification.

C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and fire sprinklers.


A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Provide labels indicating brand name, style, size and thickness.

C. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

D. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACT)


1. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions; Basis-of-Design Acoustical Panel – ULTIMA High NRC.

2. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions; Basis-of-Design Woodgrain Panel – ULTIMA High NRC.





3. CertainTeed Corporation. 4. USG Corporation.

B. Basis of Design Panel: ULTIMA High NRC by Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions.

C. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E1264.

D. Classification: Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E.

E. Color: White.

F. Light Reflectance (LR): 0.88.

G. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35.

H. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.80.

I. Articulation Class (AC): 170.

J. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

K. Thickness: 7/8 inch.

L. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (CAF-1)


1. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USG Corporation.

B. Basis-of-Design Panel: WOODWORKS, Open Cell, Item 6622 by Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions.

C. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels.

D. Color: Maple.

E. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): .75.

F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Tegular with 1/4” reveal.

G. Thickness: 2 1/4 inch.

H. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.








2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


1. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USG Corporation.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C635/C635M.

C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; pre-painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel or aluminum. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white at acoustical panels; Black matte at woodgrain panels.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

B. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down.

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USG Corporation.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

C. Perimeter trim at open grid suspended ceiling in Café shall be 4-inches high and shall match maple finish of lay-in panels.











2.7 SOUND ABSORPTION CEILING PANELS


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USG Corporation.

B. Basis of Design: TECTUM Finale Ceiling Panels, by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

C. Sound Absorption Ceiling Panels:

1. Composition: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement. 2. Color: White. 3. Panel Size: As indicated. 4. Thickness: 1-1/2” thick. 5. Edge Profile: Long edge beveled, short edge square. 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423, 0.85. 7. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install building construction materials that show visual evidence of biological growth.

B. Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering, concrete, and terrazzo work before installation. Complete and approve mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line prior to the start of acoustical ceiling installation. Provide acoustical work complete with necessary fastenings, clips, and other accessories required for a complete installation. Do not expose mechanical fastenings in the finished work. Lay out hangers for each individual room or space. Provide hangers to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles, and other penetrations through ceilings. Keep main runners and carrying channels clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two main runners for each ceiling span. Wherever required to bypass an object with the hanger wires, install a sub-suspension system so that all hanger wires will be plumb.







C. Suspension System: Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M and as specified herein. Do not suspend hanger wires or other loads from underside of steel decking.

1. Plumb Hangers: Install hangers plumb and not pressing against insulation covering ducts and pipes. Where lighting fixtures are supported from the suspended ceiling system, provide hangers at a minimum of four hangers per fixture and located not more than 6 inches from each corner of each fixture.

2. Splayed Hangers: Where hangers must be splayed (sloped or slanted) around obstructions, offset the resulting horizontal force by bracing, counter-splaying, or other acceptable means.

D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Acoustical Units: Install acoustical units in accordance with the approved installation instructions of the manufacturer. Ensure that edges of acoustical units are in close contact with metal supports, with each other, and in true alignment. Arrange acoustical units so that units less than one-half width are minimized. Hold units in exposed-grid system in place with manufacturer's standard hold-down clips, if units weigh less than 1 pound per square foot.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of acoustical units and leave them free from defects. Remove units that are damaged or improperly installed and provide new units as directed.

C. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset-rubber base. 2. Thermoplastic-rubber base.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE


1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.







H. Colors: Black.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.




G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 4 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 4 inches in length.

a. Cope corners to minimize open joints.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.



RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 096566 - 1

SECTION 096566 - RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rubber floor tile. 2. Rubber sheet flooring.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of flooring with floor inserts for toilet compartment partitions and equipment.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following: 1. Floor patterns. 2. Seam locations for sheet flooring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each type, color, and pattern specified.




A. Sheet Flooring Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed sheet flooring installations using methods indicated for this Project and similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; who is acceptable to manufacturer; and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide current standard warranty, as published by the Manufacturer.



B. The rubber athletic flooring is warranted to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of three (3) years minimum from the date of shipment from the Manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Performance of the prefabricated rubber athletic flooring to conform to the following minimum criteria:

2.2 RUBBER TILE AND SHEET ATHLETIC FLOORING


1. Mondo America, Inc; Ramflex. 2. Nora Systems, Inc.; Norament 992 Grano. 3. North West Rubber, Ltd.; SportFloor, Stamina.

B. Description: Athletic flooring may consist of modular rubber tiles or rolled goods with smooth edges for adhered application.

C. Material: Rubber wear layer and rubber shock-absorbent layer, vulcanized together.

D. Traffic-Surface Texture: Smooth or Nondirectional, stipple texture.

E. Size: Manufacturer's standard-size square tile, or standard roll width x maximum available length.

F. Thickness: 3/8 inch.





G. Weight: Not less than 2.5 pounds per square foot.

H. Hardness: Shore Type A, minimum 70 required.

I. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by flooring manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and conditions indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of flooring.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F710. Proceed with

installation only if pH readings are within flooring manufacturer’s written recommended tolerances.

3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed the flooring manufacturer’s written recommended area, and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 pounds of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum percent relative humidity level measurement that complies with manufacturer’s written recommendations.

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.




E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface.

C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless otherwise indicated.

D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

B. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

C. Tile Matching: Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered.

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).

D. Adhered Floor Tile: Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.4 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Unroll sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

B. Lay out sheet flooring as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.



2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.

3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Locate seams according to approved Shop Drawings.

C. Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.5 LEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in writing

by manufacturer.

B. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1. Concrete. 2. Fiber-cement board. 3. Steel and iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Wood.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Matte finish – flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell-like): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin-like): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-gloss) : 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High-gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.



1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



C. Do not apply paints when surface and environmental conditions do not comply with paint manufacturer’s written recommendations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Cloverdale Paint. 4. PPG Paints. 5. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 7. Zinsser; Rust-Oleum Corporation.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to products listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: For field applications, verify paints and coatings comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 5. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.











1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.



E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.



C. Apply paints to manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness (DFT), to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 3.1C-G3:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

1) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer.

2) Rust-Oleum; Zinsser, AllPrime Interior-Exterior Primer Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Loxon, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #161.



1) PPG Architectural; High Performance Coatings, Devflex 4212HP Waterborne Acrylic Eggshell Enamel.

2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, Industrial Choice 5200 System DTM Acrylic. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, DTM Acrylic Eg-Shel.

B. Cement Board Substrates:

1. Latex System MPI EXT 3.3J-G3/4:


1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal

Primer/Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Loxon, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15.

1) Behr; Premium Plus, Exterior Satin Enamel 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex

Satin 3) SherwinWilliams; SuperPaint, Exterior Latex Satin; .

C. Steel and Iron Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.1C-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163.

1) Behr; Behr Premium, Int/Ext Direct to Metal Semi-Gloss Paint. 2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, 3800 System DTM Acrylic Enamel. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, DTM Semi-Gloss.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 5.3J-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, Sierra Performance Griptec Multi Surface Primer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.




c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

1) Behr; Behr Premium, Int/Ext Direct to Metal Semi-Gloss Paint. 2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, 3800 System DTM Acrylic Enamel. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, DTM Semi-Gloss.

E. Wood Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 6.3J-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood, MPI #5.

1) Cloverdale Paint Prime Solution Interior/Exterior Alkyd Stain Blocking Primer.

2) Rust-Oleum; Zinsser, Allprime Oil Base Primer Sealer and Stain Blocker. 3) Sherwin Williams; A-100, Ext Fast Dry Stain Blocking Alkyd Primer.


c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

1) Cloverdale Paint Cloverdale, EcoLogic High Performance Ultra Low VOC Int/Ext Waterborne Semi-Gloss.

2) Rust-Oleum; Rust Oleum, 3800 System DTM Acrylic Enamel. 3) Sherwin Williams; All Surface Enamel, All Surface Enamel HP Semi-Gloss.



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 3. Steel and iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Matte-finish – flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2 (High side sheen flat - velvet-like): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell-like): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin-like): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High-gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.



C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply paints when surface and environmental conditions do not comply with paint manufacturer’s written recommendations.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Paint Company; Behr Process Corporation. 2. PPG Paints. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, verify paints and coatings comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.



4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply paints to manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness (DFT), to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Pipe hangers and supports. c. Metal conduit.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:



1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 3.1L-G5:


1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal

Primer/Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; Loxon, Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #153.

1) Behr Paint; Behr Pro HPC, Pre-Catalyzed WB Epoxy Semi-Gloss. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Pitt-Glaze WB1 Int. Semi-Gloss Pre-

Catalyzed WB Acrylic Epoxy. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro Industrial Pre-Cat Epoxy Semi-Gloss.

B. CMU Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 4.2K-G5:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.

1) Behr Paint; Behr Pro, Block Filler. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Int./Ext. Masonry Hi Fill Latex

Block Filler. 3) Sherwin Williams; PrepRite, Int/Ext Block Filler.





C. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 5.1B-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer.



2) PPG Architectural; High Performance Coatings, Pitt-Tech Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer.

3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.





D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI INT 5.3B-5G:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Exterior Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; High Performance Coatings, Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 PF /

Devflex 4020 PF. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer.





E. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and architectural woodwork.

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 6.3V-G5:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Int/Ext Multi Surface Primer and Sealer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Seal Grip Int/Ext Acrylic Universal

Primer/Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; PrepRite ProBlock, Primer Sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.



c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex

Semi-Gloss. 3) Sherwin Williams; Pro Industrial, Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M-G3:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Interior All-in-One Primer. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG Paints, Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex

Sealer. 3) Sherwin Williams; ProMar 200, Zero Interior Latex Primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell-like (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.

1) Behr Paint; Premium Plus, Interior Eggshell Paint. 2) PPG Architectural; Dulux (CA), Ultra Zero VOC Int Latex Pearl. 3) Sherwin Williams; ProMar 200 HP Zero VOC, Interior Acrylic Eg-Shel.



DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cast dimensional characters. 2. Cutout dimensional characters. 3. Fabricated channel dimensional characters. 4. Molded-plastic dimensional characters.



B. Shop Drawings: For signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half

size. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



A. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and other loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Molded-Plastic Characters: Characters having uniform faces and profiles, and as follows:


a. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. b. Cosco. c. Gemini Incorporated.

2. Color: Manufacturer's standard integral color process, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized. 3. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.







2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

2. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

3. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners.

4. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

5. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface and tighten.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.


ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 101423.16 - 1

SECTION 101423.16 - ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building.



B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.



A. Sample warranty.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.

1. Tactile characters shall be raised the required 1/32" inches from sign face. Glue-on letters or etched backgrounds are not acceptable.

2. All text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Braille shall be separated 1/2" from the corresponding raised characters or symbols. Grade 2 braille translation to be provided by signage manufacturer.

3. All letters, numbers and/or symbols shall contrast with their background, either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Characters and background shall have a non-glare finish.

2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign system with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:


a. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. b. Cosco. c. Mohawk Sign Systems.

2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer or Sandblasted polymer face sheet with raised graphics laminatedto phenolic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl film. c. Subsurface Graphics: Phot image or Slide-in changeable insert. d. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded to manufacturer’s recommended radius.

4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with concealed anchors.







2.3 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

B. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film with pressure-sensitive, permanent adhesive; die cut to form characters or images as indicated on Drawings and suitable for exterior applications.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized devices. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened sign unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly unless otherwise indicated.

b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, and installed in predrilled holes.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

2. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

3. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.



C. Subsurface-Etched Graphics: Reverse etch back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.

3. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

4. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position and push to engage tape adhesive.



PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 1

SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach floor-and-ceiling-anchored compartments to overhead structural system.

2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking and overhead support of floor-and-ceiling-anchored compartments.

3. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for accessories mounted on toilet compartments.


A. Product Data:

1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments:

B. Shop Drawings: For solid-plastic toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.


A. Certificates:

1. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment by manufacturer.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire Performance: Tested in accordance with, and pass the acceptance criteria of, NFPA 286.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Department of Justice "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS


1. AJW Architectural Products. 2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 3. Scranton Products.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor and ceiling anchored.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless

steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion.

3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or stainless steel.

1. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster.

F. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or extruded aluminum, or stainless steel.

a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching panel.







2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories, Heavy Duty: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- thick stainless steel paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through bolts.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, surface-mounted, cast-stainless steel latch unit, designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through bolts.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless steel hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through bolts.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, rubber-tipped, cast-stainless steel bumper at out-swinging doors. Mount with through bolts.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, cast-stainless steel pull at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through bolts.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221.

C. Brass Castings: ASTM B584.

D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B455.

E. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

F. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M.

G. Zamac: ASTM B86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.



B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners, so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust, so doors are level and aligned with panels, when doors are in closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Hand dryers. 3. Benches 4. Childcare accessories. 5. Underlavatory guards. 6. Custodial accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified, full size.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.


A. Sample warranties.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Hand Dryers: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace hand dryers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Structural Performance: Design accessories and fasteners to comply with the following requirements:

1. Grab Bars: Installed units are able to resist 250 lbf concentrated load applied in any direction and at any point.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser (T4):


a. AJW Architectural Products. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation.

2. Description: Single jumbo-roll dispenser, equipped with lock. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Non-control delivery with theft-resistant spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for 10-inch-diameter tissue rolls. Wide viewing slot in door reveals

the amount of toilet tissue on roll. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).

B. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser (T13):



2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at sides or front.











C. Soap Dispenser (T3):



2. Description: Designed for manual operation and dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. Valve - Black molded plastic push button and spout. Soap head-holding mushroom valve. Stainless steel spring. U-packing seal and duckbill. Antibacterial-soap-resistant plastic cylinder.

3. Mounting: Horizontally oriented, surface mounted (concealed vandal-resistant wall fastening).

4. Capacity: 40 fluid ounces. 5. Materials: 18-8, Type-304, 22-gauge stainless steel with satin-finish. 6. Lockset: Tumbler type. 7. Refill Indicator: Window type.

D. Grab Bar (T6, T6A, T7):



2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Sanitary-Napkin Dispenser Unit (T9):

















2. Materials:

a. Cabinet: 18-8, Type-304, 18-gauge stainless steel. All-welded construction. b. Skirt: 18-8, Type-304, 22-gauge stainless steel. c. Door: 18-8, Type-304, 18-gauge stainless steel. Door has flat design with 90°

return edges; conceals flange. Secured to cabinet with a concealed full-length stainless steel piano-hinge. Equipped with two tumbler locks keyed like other washroom accessories. Door has no brand-name advertising for products dispensed. Graphic symbols identify products dispensed and coin denomination.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Dispensing Mechanism: Two (2) two dispensing mechanisms in one cabinet to provide

sanitary napkins and tampons at Owner’s option. 5. Capacity: 20 sanitary napkins and 30 tampons. 6. Coin Mechanisms: Two (2) impact-Resistant PC-ABS Push Buttons. 25-cents single-

coin operation. Accepts one quarter (U. S.) as designated by factory setting. Coin Box is equipped with tumbler lock that opens with different key than furnished for door locks. Mechanism shall be convertible in the field to allow the change of coin denomination without removing unit from wall.

7. Coin Return Push-Button Two (2): Impact-Resistant PC-ABS Push-Button cancels selection and returns coin into product tray.

8. Product Tray: Impact-Resistant PC-ABS, provides access to dispensed product. 9. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).

F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (T5):



2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin)s.

G. Seat-Cover Dispenser (T8):













2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers. 4. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type.

H. Mirror Unit (T10):



2. Frame: Stainless steel channel.

a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

3. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Hangers: Manufacturer's standard rigid, tamper and theft resistant.

I. Hook:



2. Description: Combination door bumper and coat hook. 3. Mounting: Concealed. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Location: Provide hook mounted to entry door inside single-user toilet rooms not more

than 48 inches above the finished floor.

2.3 HAND DRYERS

A. High-Speed Air Dryer (T2):


a. AJW Architectural Products. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.














c. Excel Dryer Inc.

2. Description: High-speed, warm-air hand dryer for rapid hand drying. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted.

a. Protrusion Limit: Installed unit protrudes maximum 4 inches from wall surface.

4. Operation: Infrared-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.

a. Average Dry Time: 10-15 seconds. b. Automatic Shut Off: At 35 seconds.

5. Maximum Sound Level: 75 dB. 6. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 13 A, 1500 W.

2.4 BENCHES

A. Floor- Mounted Bench (T1):


a. AJW Architectural Products b. ASI Storage Solutions; ASI Group. c. Summit Lockers, Inc.

B. Provide bench units with overall assembly height ranging from of 17 inches minimum to 19 inches maximum.

C. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard units, with rounded corners and edges.

1. Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/2 inches thick by length as indicated. 2. Plastic bench top shall consist of either 1 inch-thick HDPE, or a 1” thick top layer and

1/2” thick bottom layer of HDPE fastened together with stainless steel fasteners. Bench tops shall be commercial texture.

a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

D. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows:

1. Tubular Steel: 1-1/2-inch-diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.

a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.





2.5 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES

A. Diaper-Changing Station:


a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Koala Kare Products; a Division of Bobrick.

2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap.

a. Engineered to support minimum of 200-lb static load when opened.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when closed.

4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: HDPE or injection-molded polypropylene, with antimicrobial

additive embedded into the bed surface, in manufacturer's standard color. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard color range. 7. Liner Dispenser: Provide separate, locking dispenser for disposable sanitary liners.

2.6 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Underlavatory Guard:


a. Buckaroos, Inc. b. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. c. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.

3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Custodial Utility Shelf (T12):













2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside.

3. Size: 30 inches long by 8 inches deep. 4. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel,

ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).

B. Custodial Mop and Broom Holder:



2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, and holders. 3. Length: 34 inches. 4. Hooks: Four. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel.

7. Location: Provide one mop and broom holder in Janitor Closet in close proximity to mop sink.

2.8 ABRICATION

A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements.



FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE




B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.




a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Nystrom.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Door Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

G. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear.

H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

I. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Decals. 3) Lettering Color: White. 4) Orientation: Vertical.







5. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries.

J. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel, TGIC polyester powder coat, HAA polyester powder coat, epoxy powder coat, or polyester/epoxy hybrid powder coat, complying with AAMA 2603.

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations indicated and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Identification: Apply decals at specified locations.

E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.






A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Twelve years.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.


a. Amerex Corporation. b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A:80B:C, 10-lbs. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.


a. Amerex Corporation. b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.











1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: Top of fire extinguisher to be at 42 inches above finished floor.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.



FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 1

SECTION 114000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes stainless steel worktables for foodservice facilities.

B. Owner-Furnished Equipment: Where indicated, Owner will furnish equipment for installation by Contractor.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification Mark certifying compliance with applicable NSF standards.

2.2 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT

A. Stainless Steel Work Tables:

1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Elkay Foodservice Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering equivalent products may be incorporated into the Work.

2. Description: Prep table.

a. Tops: Stainless steel, Type 304, 0.078 inch thick, reinforced and sound deadened.

1) Back Splash: Manufacturer's standard height.

2) Edge: Bullnose on front edge, straight on sides and back.


FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 2

b. Welded Undershelf: Stainless steel, Type 304, 0.050 inch thick.

c. Legs: Stainless steel tubing. d. Feet: Plastic adjustable bullets or Stainless steel, flanged, adjustable bullets.

3. Materials:

a. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, austenitic stainless steel, type as indicated.

4. Stainless Steel Finish: Directional satin finish, ASTM A480/A480M, No. 4.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel Finishes: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install foodservice equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required.

C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition.

C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.



ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1

SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.


1. Verification Samples: 6 inches square, representing actual materials, color and pattern.







A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.


A. Deliver in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings.

B. Store and handle products per manufacturer's recommendations.




A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating warranty for interior shading.

1. Shade Hardware: 10 years. 2. Shade Cloth: Manufacturer's standard ten year warranty. 3. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including

scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas, which are deemed owner’s responsibility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS


1. Draper Inc. 2. Insolroll Window Shading Systems. 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc.

B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, sill mounted.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.







D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

F. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Exposed with endcaps. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Basis-of Design Shadeband Material: Thermoveil 1300 Series, by MechoShade Systems, Inc.

B. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

C. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer. 2. Type: 21 percent polyester core, 79 percent vinyl on polyester. 3. Weave: Basketweave, 2-by-2 dense pattern. 4. Thickness: 0.03 inch. 5. Weight: 16.8 oz./sq. yd. 6. Roll Width: To suit clear width between window mullions. 7. Orientation on Shadeband: Railroaded. 8. Openness Factor: 5 percent. 9. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:



1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under the project conditions.

C. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades.

3.3 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop drawings.

1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.



B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Replace shades exceeding specified tolerances at no extra cost to Owner.

D. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner's personnel.

F. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

1. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition.



SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 123661.16 - 1

SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Countertop brackets.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.


a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. b. Formica Corporation. c. Swan Corporation (The).

2. Type: Provide Standard type.

3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.







2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top and bottom, as indicated.

C. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

D. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

E. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.


B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

2.4 COUNTERTOP BRACKETS

A. Concealed Countertop Brackets: Horizontal support, two-contact-point mounting system.


a. Centerline Steel, LLC. b. Federal Brace Company. c. Hampton Bay.

B. Basis of Design: Centerline Brackets FLB “Forward L” by Centerline Steel, LLC).

C. Horizontal Support: 2 1/2”-wide x 1/2”-thick steel construction with (4) 1/4” mounting holes, countersunk, offset pattern.

D. Flange: 2 1/2”-wide x 4”-tall x 1/4”-thick steel construction with (2) 1/4” mounting holes, countersunk.







E. Length: To suit countertop depth.

F. Color and Finish: Black, baked-on or powder-coat finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

C. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

E. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."



ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 124813 - 1

SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient entrance mats.

2. Recessed frames.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.

2. Divisions between mat sections.

3. Perimeter floor moldings and frames.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.

2.2 RESILIENT ENTRANCE MATS





1. American Floor Products Company, Inc.

2. C/S Group.

3. Mats Incorporated.

B. Resilient Link Mats: Reversible vinyl or rubber link mats, 7/16 inch thick, with stainless-steel wire link rods, vulcanized edge-nosing trim, steel-reinforced end trim, and links consisting of rectangular units or continuous strips in a heel-proof, close-weave pattern with openings between links not exceeding 1/8 inch wide by 1 inch long.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2. Mat Size: As indicated.

2.3 FRAMES

A. Recessed Frames: Manufacturer's standard extrusion.

1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

B. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install recessed mat frames and mats to comply with manufacturer's written instructions so that tops of mats will be flush with adjoining finished flooring. Set mats with tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.






B. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.






SPLASH PAD BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 130505 - 1

SECTION 130505 - SPLASH PAD BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. References used in electrical and control Specifications.

2. Regulatory requirements for electrical construction.

3. Requirements of equipment and materials.

4. Workmanship.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

2. C62.41-IEEE - Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. EPA-Environmental Protection Agency

C. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association

1. S-95-658 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable.

D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

1. 112 - Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

2. 519 - Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power

Systems.

E. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute

1. LPI175 - Lightning Protection System Installation Standard.

F. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association

1. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.

G. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.

2. MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

3. PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.

4. ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated

Not More Than 2,000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.

5. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).






H. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

I. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

1. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

J. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1. UL-6 - Rigid Metal Conduit.

2. UL-83 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires and Cables.

3. UL-96 - Lightning Protection Components.

4. UL-360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.

5. UL-467 - Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

6. UL 486D - Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or In Damp or Wet

Locations.

7. UL-508 - Industrial Control Equipment.

8. UL-651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.

9. UL-797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing.

10. UL-810 - Capacitors.

11. UL-891 - Dead-Front Switchboards.

12. UL-913 - Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, and III,

Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

13. UL-935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts.

14. UL-1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment.

15. UL-1012 - Power Units Other Than Class 2.

16. UL-1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts.

17. UL-1449 - Surge Protection Devices

18. UL-1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

19. UL-1572 - High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All Work performed under this Contract shall conform to the latest editions of the National

Electrical Code (NFPA70), the National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C2), and the New York

State Building Codes.

1.04 INSTRUCTIONS AND PARTS LITERATURE

A. Instruction and parts literature are generally packed with electrical equipment and devices.

Contractor shall remove this literature from the packing container or equipment enclosure, identify

the literature with the equipment to which it applies, and file the literature in loose-leaf binders

with index tabs. Each binder shall have an index which lists each piece of equipment and the

literature which applies to it. An index tab shall be provided for each piece of equipment.

B. Contractor shall establish a procedure with the other trades for receiving, identifying, and filing

literature for devices which are removed from their packaging and installed by other trades.

Literature shall be provided as outlined above.






1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for equipment provided by the Electrical Contractor shall bear a stamp or specific

written certification from the Electrical Contractor, certifying the submittals have been reviewed.

B. Submit the following items consistent with Section 01 33 00. Refer to each Section under Division

13 for additional submittal requirements particular to that Section.

C. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer’s Information:

1. Product Data Sheets

a. Product and component data sheets which describe all equipment and devices to be

provided.

b. Include all features specified.

c. Provide dimensioned prints with weights.

d. Highlight or otherwise accentuate on each data sheet the specified product features and

product numbers.

2. Composite Drawing

a. Include power and control wiring for all systems and equipment.

b. Show basic systems on composite drawing.

c. Use terminal numbers on drawings and schematics.

d. Use separate drawings to show details of sub-systems.

e. Identify sub-system drawing interface points on composite drawing and sub-system

drawings; terminal numbers of interface points shall be the same on both drawings.

f. Revise or redraw manufacturer’s standard drawings to meet above requirements.

3. Record all Changes to Existing Systems

a. Revise all wiring diagrams and schematic diagrams to show final installation:

1) Includes all new and existing equipment diagrams.

4. Programmable Systems

a. Description of programmable system operation, including but not limited to input/output

functions, control capabilities, configuration procedures, starting setpoints, etc.

b. Preliminary graphic screens and reports.

1) This submittal shall occur prior to shipment of the system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All electrical and control equipment and materials shall be provided as specified in the Contract

Documents.






B. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) label

if such products are listed by UL.

C. Where applicable, equipment and materials shall conform to ANSI, ICEA, IEEE, and NEMA

Standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. All Work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner consistent with the high-quality

standards of the electrical trade. “A neat and workmanlike manner” shall be as required by NFPA

70 and shall conform to NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical

Contracting. Each electrician shall be knowledgeable and well-trained in the particular tasks to be

performed.

3.02 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Unless noted otherwise, equipment which is not free-standing shall not be mounted on wood

panels, but shall be attached to concrete or masonry walls, support channels, or building structural

steel.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Nameplates shall be used to identify all field devices.

B. All nameplates shall be engraved phenolic nameplates attached with stainless steel screws or a

permanent stamped brass tag.

3.04 RECEIVING AND STORING EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. In general, equipment packaging is not designed to protect the contents for outdoor storage. As a

minimum, Contractor shall store the equipment prior to installation in a clean, dry location free

from excessive temperatures, humidity, or foreign materials normally encountered at a Site. If the

storage facility is unheated, Contractor shall provide heating to protect equipment from

condensation, which could cause components to corrode or to be otherwise damaged.






SPLASH PAD LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES

130519 - 1

SECTION 130519 – SPLASH PAD LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. 600-volt wire and cable.

2. Terminals and connectors.

3. Installation.

4. Splices and terminations.

5. Identification.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data sheets shall be submitted for all wire and cable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE

A. Feeder and Branch Circuit Wire

1. Stranded copper conductor, solid copper for lighting and convenience receptacle circuits only.

2. THWN insulated for conductor sizes #4 AWG and smaller.

3. XHHW or THWN insulation for conductor sizes #3 AWG and larger.

B. Control Wire

1. #14 AWG, 7 or 9 strand copper.

2. THWN or XHHW insulation.

3. Solid color.

C. Insulation of all wire shall conform to ICEA S-95-658, NFPA 70, and UL-83.

D. All Wire and Cable Shall Be

1. New and coiled or on reels.

2. Each coil and/or reel shall have a label with the manufacturer's name, trade name of wire, size

of wire, and UL label.

2.2 TERMINALS AND CONNECTORS

A. Tool compressed terminals and connectors shall be made of 1 piece seamless highly conductive

copper with a uniform tin-plate coating to minimize corrosion.






CABLES

130519 - 2

B. Step-down adapters shall be copper compression type.

C. Electrical spring connectors:

1. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchlok” or “Ranger,” Ideal “Wing-Nut”.

D. Fork Terminals:

1. Vinyl or nylon self-insulated locking type.

2. Terminal insulation that supports wire insulation.

3. Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts Type FL, Burndy Type TP-LF, Panduit Type PNF, 3M Type

MNG.

E. Electrical Tape:

1. UL Listed.

2. Weather resistant.

3. Moisture resistant vinyl.

4. Rated for the voltage system which it is applied.

5. Temperature rating suitable for the application on which it is applied.

F. Waterproof kits shall be utilized for all outdoor below-grade splices and connections as follows

1. Heavy wall heat shrinkable with interior coating of hot melt adhesive – sealant. Tubing shall be

chemically cross linked, thermally stabilized polyolefin.

2. UL listed (UL-486D).

3. Manufacturer: 3M – ITCSN, or equal.

2.3 WIRE COLOR CODING

A. Contractor may use color coding at his discretion, except for the following colors, which shall be

used only as designated below for both power and control circuits.

1. Control Circuits

a. Dark Blue - Direct current circuits.

b. Light Blue - Intrinsically safe conductors.

c. Green - Grounding conductor.

d. White - Neutral conductor.

2. Power Circuits (Use solid colors through Size No. 8 AWG. Use black conductors with tape

color identification No. 6 AWG and larger)

Voltage 120/240 208Y/120 480Y/277

a. Phase A Black Black Brown

b. Phase B Red Red Orange

c. Phase C Blue Yellow

d. Neutral White White Gray






CABLES

130519 - 3

e. Ground Green Green Green

2.4 CONDUCTOR PULLING COMPOUND

A. Rated for use with the conductor insulation and conduit material.

B. Non-conductive.

C. Non-cementing.

D. Dry to a fine lubricating powder or a thin film which does not harden in conduit.

E. UL Listed.

F. Rated for repeated exposure to high heat or freezing temperatures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All wire shall be installed in the specified raceways.

B. Wire pulling shall be performed through the system in such a manner as to not exceed the

maximum tensile strength of the cable being pulled as allowed by the NFPA 70 and/or cable

manufacturer. All handling and installation of wire and cables shall be done by competent and

skilled workmen who shall use methods which will prevent damage to the wire and cable.

C. Pulling compound shall be approved by the cable manufacturer.

D. Adequate measures shall be employed to determine that the raceways are free of foreign material

and moisture before pulling wire or cable.

E. Any conductor used for equipment grounding purposes shall be green in color, unless it is bare.

Conductors with white or green covering shall not be used to indicate other than neutral or

grounding. This limitation applies to all power and control circuits.

F. Conductors shall be without splice from termination to termination, unless indicated otherwise on

the Drawings.

G. Conductors for ac and dc circuits shall be installed in separate conduits.

3.2 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. All splices, taps, and terminations shall be made with tool compressed connectors. Contractor shall

provide all wire connectors, lugs, and terminals, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Bolted compression lugs furnished as an integral part of the equipment shall be used to terminate

the conductors to that equipment.






CABLES

130519 - 4

C. Electrical spring connectors shall be used for splices and taps in lighting and 120-volt receptacle

circuits.

D. Every bolt, lug, and screw termination shall be tightened with a torque wrench or torque

screwdriver to the torque values specified in UL Standards and/or as specified by the device

manufacturer.






SPLASH PAD GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 130526 - 1

SECTION 130526 – SPLASH PAD GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. System and Equipment Grounding.

B. Installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRE

A. Class B stranded copper; either bare or with green insulation.

B. Size shall be as specified herein and as indicated in the Contract Documents.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATORS

A. Tool-compressed connectors and lugs which are UL listed (UL-467).

1. Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground”, Thomas & Betts “Blackburn” Series, or equal.

B. Bar taps for connection to bus bars which are UL listed (UL-467).

1. Manufacturer: Burndy, Thomas & Betts “Blackburn” Series, or equal.

C. Exothermic welding components.

1. Manufacturer: Continental Industries “Thermoweld”, Erico Products “Cadweld,” or equal.

D. Ground clamps shall be UL listed (UL-E10661) cast high strength corrosion resistant copper alloy.

1. Manufacturer: Burndy, Thomas & Betts “Blackburn” Series, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. An equipment grounding conductor shall be installed with each circuit, included but not limited to

feeder circuits, motor circuits, lighting circuits, and control circuits. Conductor shall be connected

to the equipment ground bus or to the enclosure if there is no ground bus.

3.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall determine if there are any other special grounding requirements for equipment

furnished on this Project and shall provide grounding as recommended by the manufacturer.





SPLASH PAD GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 130526 - 2


A. In general, splices and terminations of the grounding electrode system shall be brazed, shall be

exothermic welded, or shall be made with tool-compressed fittings.

B. Connections to bus bars or equipment enclosures shall be made with tool-compressed lugs which

are bolted to the equipment or with bar taps.

C. Connections to ground rods shall be exothermic welded. Provide adapter sleeves as required for #6

AWG conductors or smaller.

D. Connections to copper water piping shall be made with ground clamps.

3.4 SPLASH PAD EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING

A. Provide splash pad equipotential bonding as required per NEC 250 and NEC 680 and as shown on

the Drawings.






SPLASH PAD RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 130533 - 1

SECTION 130533 – SPLASH PAD RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Conduit.

2. Conduit fittings.

3. Conduit accessories

4. Underground warning tape.

5. Pull and junction boxes.

6. Fire stop material.

7. Conduit Identification.

8. Execution/Installation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following items consistent with Section 013300:

1. Product data sheets for each type of conduit.

2. If the Contractor elects to use HPDE conduit, provide the manufacturer’s recommend

procedures, instructions, materials and equipment for splicing/coupling the conduit.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT

A. Steel

1. Galvanized inside and outside.

2. NFPA 70, Article 344.

3. UL Listed.

2.02 RIGID METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Threaded couplings and fittings only; no set screw, gland type, or split fittings.

B. Grounding type insulated bushings; O-Z/Gedney Type BLG, or equal.

C. Insulated bushings; Midwest Electrical Mfg. Co., O-Z/Gedney Type B, or equal.

D. Sealing locknuts; Midwest Electrical Mfg. Co., RACO, or equal.

E. Expansion Fittings

1. 4-inches conduit movement.






2. External bonding jumper.

F. Pull Fittings (C, LB, etc.): Clamp type, stamped covers with gaskets and stainless steel screws and

clamps.

G. Conduit Hubs

1. Full contact type with sealing “O” ring.

2. Myers “Scru-tite,” or equal.

H. Material: Fittings, hubs, etc. shall be galvanized steel for galvanized steel conduit and copper free

aluminum for aluminum conduit.

2.03 CORROSION RESISTANT COATINGS:

A. Pretreatment:

1. Carboline Carbocrylilc 120 (for both steel and aluminum conduit), or equal

B. Coating:

1. Carboline Bitumastic 300M.

2. 3M Scotchrap Pipe Primer and wrapped with 3M Scotchrap Corrosion Protection Tape.

2.04 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. EPC-40-PVC and EPC-80-PVC.

B. Sunlight resistant.

C. NEMA TC2.

D. NFPA 70, Article 352.

E. UL Listed.

F. Manufacturer: Carlon, CertainTeed, or equal.

2.05 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT (HDPE)

A. Meets requirements of NFPA70.

B. Thermoplastic polymer material.

C. Smooth interior and smooth exterior wall.

D. UL listed.

E. NEMA –TC-7.






F. Manufacturer: Carlon or equal.

2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Galvanized exterior.

B. Corrosion resistant, lubricating interior coating.

C. Galvanized or Zinc Plated Finish Steel Fittings

1. Set screw, concrete-tight type, except raintight/concrete-tight gland compression type in wet

locations.

2. Insulated throat connectors.

3. Appleton, Midwest Electric, O-Z/Gedney, or equal.


E. UL Listed.

2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Galvanized steel core.

B. Built-in continuous copper ground in 1/2 inch through 1-1/4 inches.

C. PVC jacket.


E. UL listed.

F. Manufacturer: Amer-Tite Type UL, Anamet Anaconda Sealtite Type U.A., Electri-Flex Liquatite

Type L.A., or equal.

G. Connectors

1. Grounding ferrule and insulated throat.

2. Manufacturer: Appleton STB, Crouse-Hinds LTB, Midwest Electric LTB, or equal.

H. Grounding liquid tight connectors:


2. Ground lug cast as integral part of iron gland nut.

3. Manufacturer: Appleton, Efcor Brand, O-Z/Gedney, or equal

2.08 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Aluminum or galvanized steel.






B. NFPA 70, Article 348.

C. UL listed.

2.09 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. 6 inches wide, 4-mil polyethylene film.

B. Vivid, opaque, long-lasting red color with bold, black letters.

C. Lettering

1. Top line – “...CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION...”

2. Bottom line – “...ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW...”

D. Seton Name Plate Corp. No. 210 ELE, EMED Co. Stock No. UT27737-6, or equal.

2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Covers attached with hinges and stainless steel screws located within 1/2 inch of each corner

opposite the hinges and spaced not more than 12 inches apart.

B. Neoprene gasketed covers.

C. Sized per NFPA 70 with enough capacity to add to each side at least 2 conduits of the same size as

the largest conduit entering the box.

D. Galvanized fittings and boxes for EMT conduit.

2.11 FIRE RETARDANT MATERIAL

A. Fire stop foam.

B. Fire stop sealant.

C. 3-hour fire rating.

D. UL Classified per UL-1479.

E. Chase Technology Corp., Dow Corning, General Electric, 3M, or equal.

2.12 DUCT SEALING COMPOUND

A. Soft, fibrous, slightly tacky, non-hardening, and easily applied by hand at all working temperatures.

B. Clean and non-staining.

C. J.M. Clipper Corp. Duxseal, O-Z/Gedney DUX, or equal.






2.13 CONDUIT CLAMPS

A. Conduit clamps for rigid metal conduit shall be malleable iron, 1-hole clamp with malleable iron

clamp backs; Crouse-Hinds MW500 Series, Raco 1303/1324, Appleton CL75M/600M, or equal.

2.14 CONDUIT SEALS

A. Conduit seals shall be provided wherever conduits penetrate exterior concrete walls below grade,

or cross hazardous location boundaries

1. For conduits less than 60 inches below grade; OZ/Gedney Type FSK, or equal.

2. For conduits more than 60 inches below grade; OZ/Gedney Type WSK, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. All raceways shall be installed in accordance with NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good

Workmanship in Electrical Contracting, and as specified herein.

B. Conduit size shall be as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NFPA 70 with a minimum

size of 3/4 inch, except that 1/2 inch may be used to connect to devices which have a knock-out or

fitting for only 1/2-inch conduit.

C. Pull boxes or fittings shall be installed as Site and pulling requirements dictate.

D. All raceways shall be installed exposed, except where noted otherwise. All exposed raceways shall

be EMT.

E. Conduits or groups of conduits shall run parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. Grouped

conduits shall be supported at proper intervals with trapeze or bracket type hangers constructed of

galvanized Unistrut, Power-Strut, or equal. All hangers, fasteners, nuts, etc. shall be galvanized

steel or stainless steel. Support fasteners shall be preset inserts, beam clamps, expansion shields, or

gun-driven studs.

F. Conduit and Penetration Sealing

1. Any conduit run which goes through an exterior building wall or between rooms of more than

30 degrees F difference in temperature shall be sealed internally with duct sealing compound at

the point where they leave the room.

2. All penetrations thru fire rated walls shall be sealed according to NFPA 70, Article 300.21.

G. No raceways, fittings, outlets, junction boxes, or pull boxes shall be attached to grating; they shall

be connected to supports which are attached to structural members.

H. All pull and outlet boxes shall be set plumb. Boxes for concealed wiring shall be flush with the

finished surface. All boxes shall be UL listed for the location in which they are installed.






I. Expansion fittings shall be installed at building expansion joints and where the length of straight

run requires it and as required per code.

J. All conduits shall be kept dry and free of water or debris with pipe plugs or caps.

K. Conduit and boxes shall not be attached to or suspended from equipment or mechanical ductwork.

Where box or conduit must be mounted below ductwork, provide a structural channel support

which is suspended from the ceiling or bracketed from a wall. Attachments to equipment shall be

directly to the electrical devices associated with it.

L. Conduit terminations to terminal boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall have double locknuts and

insulated bushings. External locknuts shall be sealing locknuts.

M. All conduits which enter major equipment shall have grounding type insulating bushings.

N. Conduit terminations to outdoor or below ground NEMA 3R, 4, and 4X terminal boxes, pull boxes,

cabinets, and enclosures shall use full contact hubs.

O. Flexible conduit connections shall be used to connect from conduit system to equipment and

devices if a rigid connection is improper or impractical.

1. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used for flexible connections where the conduit

system is rigid metal conduit.

2. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for flexible connections where the conduit system is EMT.

3. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1-1/2 inches and larger shall have an external bonding

jumper sized in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Grounding liquidtight connectors may be used in lieu of the grounding clamp on the conduit.

P. Underground conduit runs shall have a minimum cover of 2 feet, and shall be rigid nonmetallic

conduit, unless noted otherwise

1. Conduit shall be sloped to drain to handholes or pull boxes.

2. Rigid metal conduit shall be used for the vertical elbow and riser out of the ground.

3. Rigid metal conduit installed underground or in contact with concrete shall have a corrosion

resistant coating or covering.

4. HPDE conduit may be used for underground conduit runs longer than 50 feet.

Q. Contractor shall do all trenching for underground conduit with a minimum size trench. 3 inches of

sand shall be placed below and above buried conduit in trench. All fill material shall be placed in

12-inch lifts and compacted to 90-Percent Standard Proctor Density. Underground warning tape

shall be laid in the trench approximately 9 inches below the surface.

1. Excavating, backfilling, and grading shall comply with Division 31.

R. A nylon pull cord shall be installed in each empty conduit.

S. Only raceway types which are specified in this Section shall be used.






T. The roadway, sidewalk, or grade beneath which conduit is routed shall be restored to its original or

better condition.

1. Provide grading, soil, and seeding or sod to restore turf to original or better conditions.

2. Coordinate type of soil, seeding and/or sod with Owner to match existing.

U. All splices performed on the HDPE conduit shall use equipment and procedures recommended by the

manufacturer and which meet NFPA 70.

3.02 OPENINGS

A. Contractor shall review the size and location of all openings to be sure they meet the requirements

of the equipment that is furnished and/or installed as a part of this Contract. Contractor shall be

responsible for providing all required openings necessary for a complete installation. All required

openings are not shown on the Drawings.

B. All openings shall be filled with an approved sealant, caulking, or grout after the conduit or cable

installation is complete.






SPLASH PAD GENERAL 131113 - 1

SECTION 131113 – SPLASH PAD GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:

a. General conditions for all splash pad work.

b. Construction and start-up supervision.

c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

B. Related Documents

1. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing the layout, dimensions, operating characteristics of each

piece of equipment, valves, controls, flow meters, piping, and all miscellaneous materials and items

specified to be furnished.

1. Provide per Division 1.

2. Provide plan and elevations drawn to scale showing the size and placement of each item to be

installed. Shop drawings shall be submitted prior to fabrication or purchase.

B. Project Record Documents: Provide per Division 1.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: See Division 1 and Part 3 of this Specification.

D. Warranties: Provide written warranties addressed to the Owner as specified in Division 1 and Part 1

of this Specification. Warranties shall be submitted prior to Final Payment for the Project.

Extended warranties shall be provided where noted.

E. Test Reports: Reports of all tests shall be distributed by the testing laboratory after each test with

copies sent to the Owner, Engineer and Contractor.

F. Contractor shall provide layout drawings of all piping with elevations before Work on piping

commence.


A. Experience: The Contractor/subcontractor that is performing this work shall have been engaged in

the construction of municipal swimming pools/splash pads and/or had equivalent experience as






judged by the Owner and Engineer with fusion welded HDPE pipe installation, concrete flat work,

treatment systems and mechanical/electrical systems similar to that required for this project for a

period of at least 5 years.

B. Superintendent: Contractor shall provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and

experienced in the construction of the required work, who shall be present during the execution of

this portion of the work and who shall personally direct the work of this Section.

C. Codes and Regulations: Contractor shall have a working knowledge of and shall comply with all

State, City, and County Codes and Regulations applicable to the work under this Section. including

but not limited to:

1. NSF International/ANSI Standard 50 – Circulation System Components and Related Materials

for Swimming Pools, Spas/Hot Tubs.

2. Article 680 of the National Electrical Code.

3. Compilation of the Rules and Regulations of the State of New York (NYCRR).

Part 6, Subpart 6-3 Recreational Aquatic Spray Grounds.

4. Any and all other requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction for the Project

location.

5. Contractor shall obtain all applicable permits and pay any fees required to obtain permits.

D. Testing: Density testing for pipe trenching and backfilling of pipes and structures, shall be by

Owner. Costs for retests due to failure to meet specified requirements shall be paid for by the

Contractor.

E. Patented Materials: Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or

claims for infringement of any patient right and save the Owner and Engineer harmless from loss

on account thereof.

F. Quality of Materials: The materials, products, and equipment specified herein establish the

standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality. Complete submittal data must

be provided to the Engineer for review and approval or rejection. No substitutes may be made

without prior approval. If a substitute is approved, all Bidders will be notified by Addendum so all

may offer the approved substitute.

G. Quality of Labor: The Contractor shall use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in

the trade involved in each type of work required for the splash pad construction. In acceptance or

rejection of installed work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen.


A. Equipment: All practical precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to equipment and materials

on the Site. All items of operating equipment shall be kept covered or stored out of the weather.


A. Existing Conditions: Contractor use of the Site is limited to the areas shown on the Drawings

and/or approved by the Owner. Contractor shall provide and maintain access during construction.






Any damage to any facilities around the Site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any and

all damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

B. Protection: Protect all parts of the Project from inclement weather:

1. Particular attention shall be given to protect newly placed concrete slabs and decks from rain

damage and from too rapid drying during hot, dry weather.

2. Contractor shall protect structures from damage, uplift, etc. throughout the Project.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty with 2-year correction period from the actual Substantial Completion Date shall apply to

all work in Division 13, unless otherwise stated for a longer period for specific items. Warranty

papers shall be provided for each of the major items of manufactured equipment when requested.

1.7 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

A. Piping, equipment locations, conduit, or other modifications required because of use of equipment

different from that shown on the Drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no cost to

the Owner and shall also include any Design Team review and redesign costs. All changes must be

approved by the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All of the Contractor’s work shall be performed by skilled workmen experienced in splash pad/

swimming pool construction. All cutting and patching of existing materials shall be neatly done.

Piping and equipment shall be carefully arranged in an orderly manner for ease of maintenance,

operation, and repair. All piping must drain to low points and be provided with convenient drain

valves at low points whether or not they are shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be

solely responsible for the condition of all pipes, structures, equipment, etc. throughout the

construction period.

3.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Coordinate with Section 130526, Splash Pad Electrical Drawings and Division 26 - Electrical to

ground and bond all items in accordance with the most current version of Article 680 of the

National Electrical Code, State Electrical Code and local code requirements.

3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. The Contractor shall provide all excavations necessary for construction. Machine excavation and

hand trimming shall be carried out as one operation to minimize over-excavation.






B. Excavation and backfill shall be performed in accordance with requirements specified in the

Contract documents.


A. Testing: Shall comply with requirements specified throughout the Project Manual.

3.5 MANUFACTURER SERVICES AND STARTUP

A. Contractor shall be responsible for the initial startup and adjusting of splash pad and all splash pad

related equipment. After completion of installation of all equipment and all that is related, the

equipment and installation shall be inspected and approved by a manufacturer trained and approved

technician as being in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.

After such inspection, the equipment shall be field aligned and given any required adjustment, and

when complete the various items of equipment shall be ready to be placed into operation under the

supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Manufacturer's representative shall certify to the

Engineer that the equipment is installed and operates correctly.

B. The Contractor shall schedule a manufacturer trained and approved technician at a time agreeable

to the Owner, to train Owner’s personnel in the proper operation and preventive maintenance of all

equipment, after all equipment has been installed and certified by the respective manufacturers.

The following minimum times shall be provided (time does not include travel time to and from

Site) for start-up training to instruct the Owner in operation and maintenance procedures, and to

certify to the Engineer that the equipment is operating correctly:

1. Splash Pad Equipment and Controls 8 hours.

2. Splash Pad Equipment & Controls Follow-Up 4 hours.

a. (Follow-up training after the splash pad has operated for a period of time (Scheduling as

selected by Owner - Could be during first or second operating season).

C. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the condition of all piping, structures, equipment,

etc. through Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall be provide qualified representatives to

supervise the overall splash pad startup, adjust all equipment, valves, etc. as required and shall be

solely responsible for startup, shutdown, and winterization for the first operating splash pad season,

and for the condition of all pipes and equipment throughout the winter after the first operating

season. The Contractor shall provide a qualified representative to supervise the installation and

startup in first season of operation and shall instruct the maintenance personnel in the care and

service of the equipment. He shall return at the request of the Owner not less than 2 times during

the first year of operation for review of the operation and maintenance of the system and shall be

available when needed for emergency service throughout the warranty period.

D. The Contractor shall video record training sessions and provide two (2) copies for Owner to keep

for future reference. The Contractor shall coordinate all training to allow for this option.

E. All of these services shall be included in the Project Base Bid.

3.6 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL






A. Contractor shall provide 2 hard copies (and 3 electronic PDF copies) of operation and maintenance

manuals for each piece of equipment, valve, materials, etc. and shall provide instructions on the

proper draining of each piece of equipment, the piping, and the splash pad. Manufacturer’s data in

each manual shall be the printed literature of the manufacturer. Photocopies of such literature are

not acceptable. Standard information in the manufacturer’s literature that does not apply to the

specific model provided shall be crossed out. This material shall be bound in 3 ring binders or

spiral binder type and transmitted to the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the Project. In

addition, provide the following information in the 3-ring binders:

1. Copies of all approved shop drawings.

2. Manufacturer’s wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment.

3. Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements.

4. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies.

5. Parts lists for manufactured equipment.

6. Exploded drawing for each piece of equipment with field replaceable parts.

7. Valve schedules.

8. Lubrication instructions, including list/frequency of lubrication done during construction.

9. Warranties.

10. Manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance and operations for each piece of new equipment.

11. Spare parts list.

12. Narrative on controls.

13. Start-up and shutdown procedures that address specifics to this Project and specific equipment

and options provided for this Project. Procedures shall reference valve tags and valve

positioning for various modes of operation.

14. Trouble shooting information.

15. Written winterization manual, including the proper status and winterization of every valve and

pipe in the system.

16. Schematic drawing on the complete installed splash pad system. Drawing shall include all

valves and valve schedules relating to valve tags installed on the valves.

17. Additional information as indicated in the other Sections of the Construction Standards.

18. PDF copies of the final Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be as follows:

a. Provide 3 digital copies in a PDF format saved to a CD, flash drive or other format

approved by Owner and Engineer. The saved files shall be clearly identified and organized

in a similar manner to the hard copies.

1) Data saved on the disks shall be accessible and neatly organized.

2) Provide a table of contents which utilizes bookmarks. The bookmark shall take the

reader to a specific page when the reader clicks on the desired title in the table of

contents. A bookmark shall be provided for materials associated with each piece of

equipment included in the O&M manual.






SPLASH PAD RECREATION EQUIPMENT 131118 - 1

SECTION 131118 – SPLASH PAD RECREATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Work shall include, but is not limited to:

a. Furnish and install splash pad play equipment, activation devices and controller, and

manifold.

b. Furnish and install all piping, valves, electrical, and accessory items shown and/or

specified as needed to form complete operating system in conjunction with splash pad

equipment.

c. Contractor shall coordinate with the equipment supplier and furnish and install all

components, wiring and accessories to provide a complete and operational system that

complies with all local, state, and federal requirements.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. This installation shall comply with all applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following

codes:

1. All local, state and governing building, plumbing electrical, health, etc. codes.

2. National Electrical Code (NEC).

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

4. NYSDOH Subpart 6-3: Splash Pad.

5. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

B. Materials furnished hereunder shall comply with the latest edition of applicable standard

specifications published by the following organizations:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

4. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE).

5. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

6. Commercial Standards (CS).

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

8. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).


A. Owner has selected to use splash pad related equipment as manufactured by Vortex Aquatic

Structures International, Inc. as identified in this Section. Vortex Manufacturer Representative for

the project area is Denzak Recreational Design and Supply, (800) 925-1545, Contact: Joe Denzak.






Contractor shall purchase and install the Vortex materials identified in the Specifications and as

shown on the Drawings.

B. Contractor shall include and schedule the manufacturer representative to attend a pre-installation

meeting with Contractor, Owner, and Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks prior to starting work of this

Section. Contractor shall use the manufacturer representative to provide additional guidance and

recommendations throughout construction.

C. Certain sections of the Specifications contain performance criteria rather than product descriptions.

It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to ensure that all criteria are satisfied, and the burden of

proof of conformance shall rest with the Contractor. The Engineer shall require complete

calculation, past performance records, and if required, inspection trips of similar facilities to

substantiate conformance with these criteria. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of conformance

and the Contractor is cautioned that he will be required to Bid and provide a finished product

meeting all stated criteria.

D. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum of 3-years

experience.

E. Upon completion of construction, Contractor shall include and arrange for the manufacturer

representative to provide onsite training for the Owner relative to startup, shutdown and

winterization procedures, day to day operation, and maintenance procedures, control programming,

etc. for the splash pad.

F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters’ Laboratories

(UL) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing 3 copies plus the quantity that Contractor would

like returned to them of all submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data on specified systems, including all components.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location of spray features, activators, control system, valves, as well as

dimensions, connection details, details of assembly and interface with adjacent construction and

equipment, anchors, and utility rough-in locations.

D. Certificates: Certify that products of this Section meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions for specified equipment

including each component.

F. Project Closeout Items.

G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Provide operating and maintenance instructions for the entire

system, including but not limited to start-up procedures, day to day operation of the system,






maintenance instructions and maintenance schedules, instructions for winterizing, reprogramming

controllers, parts lists, etc.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. All aquatic play products and associated equipment must be properly wrapped and secured in place

while in transport to the Site. Care shall be observed during offloading and handling to prevent

excessive stress and abrasions.

B. The Contractor shall keep the play products and associated equipment stored in safe secured areas

until the actual time of installation.

C. Protective wrapping on the aquatic play features must be left in place until construction work for

the splash pad is complete.

D. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage.

Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.

E. Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture or water damage.

F. Store materials under cover and elevated above grade.

G. Replacements: In the event of damage, loss, etc. immediately make all repairs and replacements

necessary to the approval of Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. In general, correct defective work of materials and workmanship within a 2-year period after

Substantial Completion for all Project elements. Additional manufacturer warranties are noted in

the following Paragraph B.

B. The following is a description of the Splash Pad Equipment Manufacturer Warranties to be

provided:

1. 25-year warranty on stainless steel water play features, stainless steel anchoring systems, and

aluminum spheres.

2. 5-year warranty on brass components, including spray nozzles, spray caps, and spray heads.

High-density polyethylene components, polyurethane components, and ultra high molecular

weight polyethylene components. The stainless steel automated water distribution manifold,

drain boxes, strainers, and electrical enclosures.

3. 2-year warranty on coatings, stainless steel hardware and moving parts, fiberglass products,

Seeflow Polymers, Soft Touch Elastomers (Toe Guards), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping,

fittings, ball valves, check valves, pressure gauges, electrical relays, terminal blocks, actuated

valves, programmable logic controller (PLC controller), time switches, manual switches,

transformers, breakers, electrical wiring, and connections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS






2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER

A. Spray features, activators, and control system shall be supplied by Vortex, Montreal, Canada (Tel

514-694-3868), Local Manufacturer Representative Denzak Recreational Design and Supply (Tel

800-925-1545). Contact: Joe Denzak.

2.02 SPLASH PAD EQUIPMENT

A. Spray features shall operate at the flow rates as indicated in the Specifications.

B. General Product Construction:

1. Stainless Steel Structural Tubing: Shall be 304/304L, structurally strong, durable and resistant

to corrosive environments. Rigid centricast fiber reinforced (FRP) and/or molded fiberglass,

PVC, filament wound tubing, galvanized steel, or aluminum shall not be utilized for any above

or below grade play product structures.

2. Mounting and Assembly Hardware: All hardware and anchoring systems shall be 304/304L

stainless steel. All Play Products and Ground Spay systems shall include an integrated

anchoring and leveling system facilitating installation and a flush surface finish. Exposed and

accessible hardware shall be tamper-resistant, requiring a special tool for removal to deter

vandalism and theft.

3. Spray nozzles, Caps, and Heads: Shall be manufactured from C360 brass and shall use tamper

resistant tools for installation and removal. PVC, Nylon, and Delrin ™ shall not be utilized.

All grade level play products are to be furnished with appropriate winterization caps

4. Play Product Finish: Shall be polished stainless steel finish or polyester smooth glossy heat-

cured powder coat that is UV and chemical resistant and suitable for public spaces. Color

selections to be made by Owner from manufacturer standard colors.

5. Material for Paneling, Signage, Water Deflection, and Toe Guards: All polyethylene,

polyurethane, elastomers, and Seeflow polymers used for paneling, signage, or water deflection

shall be resistant to chlorinated water and be ultraviolet stabilized to inhibit sunlight fading.

6. Safety and Craftsmanship: All edges shall be machined to a rounded finish. All welds shall be

watertight, buffed smooth, or polished to a non-visible finish and factory pressure tested.

Accessible nozzles and spray heads shall be recessed to ensure a completely safe play

environment with no pinch points, head entrapments, or protrusion hazards. All products shall

be designed in accordance with ASTM F1487 and CSA Z614-98 regulations for public

playgrounds.

7. Bonding/Grounding: All play equipment is to be grounded and bonded per the requirements of

a permanently installed pool and splash pad per article 680 of the NEC.

8. Concrete footings shall be as shown on the Drawings and specified. The Contractor shall

provide all labor, material, and equipment to construct the concrete footings as shown on the

Drawings and shall confirm with manufacturer regarding installation requirements.

C. Spray Feature Equipment List:

1. Feature Accessories:

a. Manufacturer shall provide winterization accessories, i.e. caps, plugs, etc. for all water

features.






2. Directional Jet No. 1 (VOR-305.4000) (Quantity: 4):

a. Play Product Structure: The Directional Jet No. 1 shall be constructed of 304/304L

stainless steel with an outside diameter of 3 inches and a wall thickness of 3/4 inch. The

spray head housing shall be fitted with a spray cap assembly consisting of a brass locking

ring and an adjustable brass spray sphere. The nozzle system shall be free of finger

entrapment hazards. The anchoring system shall have an integrated leveling system

facilitating installation and a plumb finished to the activity deck surface.

b. Overall play product dimensions: The overall height of the Play Product shall be

0 inches above ground.

c. Play Product Interactivity: The high or low streaming arc of water produced by the

Directional Water Jet creates visual interest.

d. Hydraulic Activity/Components: The water effect from the spray head shall produce a

single soft stream adjustable from the vertical position to a maximum of 25 degrees from

vertical. Rotating the adjustable spray nozzle 90 degrees from the vertical position sets the

spray head to its water-tight winterized position.

e. Hydraulic Requirements: The hydraulic requirements shall be 2 gpm at 3-5 psi.

3. Geyser (VOR-301.4000) (Quantity: 4):

a. Play Product Structure: The Ground Geyser shall be constructed of 304/304L with an

outside diameter of 3 inches. The brass spray cap and winter cap shall be threaded into the

geyser body using a tamper-resistant tool. Tamper resistant winter cap shall be included.

The anchoring system shall have an integrated leveling system facilitating installation and

a plumb finished to the activity deck surface.

b. Overall play product dimensions: The overall height of the Play Product shall be 0 inches

above ground.

c. Play Product Interactivity: Users can touch the soft frothy water falling down in contrast to

the more powerful streams spraying up from the center.

d. Hydraulic Activity/Components: The spray cap shall have a 10-hole spray pattern angled at

5 degrees from vertical so that multiple streams spray water out at symmetrical angles

forming an elegant geyser effect.

e. Hydraulic Requirements: The hydraulic requirements shall be 4.5 gpm at 5-10 psi.

4. Water Bloom No. 1 (VOR-322.4000) (Quantity: 1):

a. Play Product Structure: The Water Bloom No. 1 shall be constructed of 304/304L stainless

steel with an outside diameter of 3 inches. The lead-free brass spray cap shall be fastened

to the body using tamper-resistant tool. A Tamper resistant brass winter cap shall be

included. The embedded anchoring and leveling system shall be used. Ground sprays are

compatible with many nozzles each producing different water effects. The spray zone of

each chosen nozzle varies according to its respective water effect.

b. Overall play product dimensions: The overall height of the Play Product shall be 0 inches

above ground.

c. Play Product Interactivity: Users can play with the various levels of water jets created by

the spray cap as well as admire the volume it creates.

d. Hydraulic Activity/Components: The spray cap shall have thirteen (13) holes at varying

angles. The hole-pattern creates layers of water jets and a visual volume of water.







5. Fountain Spray No. 1 (VOR-7513.0000) (Quantity: 4):

a. Play Product Structure: The Fountain Spray No. 1 VOR-7513 shall be constructed of

304/304L stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 3". The lead-free

brass spray shall be threaded into the stainless steel spray head housing using a tamper-

resistant tool. Tamper resistant brass winter cap shall be included. The Embedded

anchoring and leveling system shall be used.

b. Overall play product dimensions: The overall height of the Play Product shall be 0" above

ground.

c. Play Product Interactivity: Users can experience a variety of water effects: the gentle

streams falling down, mist from under the water arcs and higher pressure at the core.

d. Hydraulic Activity/Components: The lead-free brass spray cap shall have an

11-hole spray pattern, 3 holes angled at 5 degrees from vertical and 8 holes angled at 10

degrees from vertical.


6. Safeswap Anchoring System:

a. Shall be provided for the following features, confirm with manufacturer:

1) Bollard Activator (Safeswap No. 1). Quantity 1.

b. Safeswap™ No1, 55000.0430, shall be constructed of 304/304L stainless steel. The

Safeswap™ Anchoring System shall provide the ability to add/remove/interchange select

play products without having to incur any additional infrastructure costs. The anchoring

system shall have an integrated leveling system facilitating installation and a flush finish to

the activity deck surface without any protruding bolts or hardware. The bollard shall be

fastened directly to the Safeswap™ Anchoring system. The dead and live loads shall be

distributed onto the Safeswap™ Anchoring system flange plate. A neoprene sealing gasket

shall provide a water tight seal between the bollard flange and the Safeswap™ flange.

Mechanical fastening of the Bollard. Overall play product dimensions: The overall height

of the Product shall be 5 1/8 inches with 11 inch diameter.

D. Activator:

1. Bollard Activator (VOR-611.2008) (Quantity: 1)

a. Play Product Structure: The Activator shall be constructed of bent 304/304L stainless steel

structural tubing with an outside diameter of 4-1/2" and a wall thickness of 0.120 inches.

The upper part of the feature is to be constructed with a 45° elbow. The activator shall

have no moving parts and run on a low voltage electrical supply. A capacitive sensorswitch

to be used as an interface for processing user input activation. The activation cap shall

consist of a high impact-resistant protective cap. The protective cap shall be constructed of

316 Stainless steel and powder coated, the Stainless Steel Button integrated and shall be

secured in place using tamper-resistant fasteners. The Safeswap™ anchoring and leveling

system shall be used.






b. Overall play product dimensions: Activator shall have an overall height of 39” above the

final grade.

c. Play Product Interactivity: Activator shall be the direct interface between the users of the

aquatic play area and the aquatic Play Products. The pre-programmed sequences of the

aquatic Play Products shall be activated only when the touch-activated button on the

Activator is pressed by the user. The Activator shall have a LED light activation signal.

E. LED Lights:

1. UL Certified LED Light Module (VOR-7056.4000) (Quantity:10)

a. Play Product Structure: LED Light Module shall be constructed of 304/304L stainless

steel with a can outside diameter of 8 5/8” inches and a wall thickness of 0.148” inches.

The LED Light shall consist of a LED, a glass cover, a housing, a ring to mount the LED

and glass into housing, a inside power cable and a cable gland. The LED shall be 4 x 2.5W

type high power LED RGBW-in one. The glass shall be 8mm step tempered. The housing

shall be molding shape. The ring shall be constructed of IP68 316T (Titanium) stainless

steel. The inside power and communication cable shall be 0.9m SOOW 18/5 (5 x

0.82mm2). Power and communication from controller shall be using UL ceritified's

combined DMX/POWER cable specified in VOR-7056.4000 Installation drawings. The

junction box shall be constructed of cast laiton and grounded to the niche. The LED fixture

and the junction box shall be classified by UL as submersible. The power range handled by

the LED fixture shall be both 11-14VAC and 11-26VDC. For UL certification reasons,

Vortex uses only the 11-14VAC for powering VOR-7056.4000. The anchoring system

shall have an integrated leveling system facilitating installation. All components on the

electrical line shall be UL certified : LED fixture, cable gland on LED fixture, cable from

LED fixture to junction box, junction box, contact terminal, cable glands on junction box,

cable glands on the niche.

b. Overall play product dimensions: The overall diameter (including the niche leveling flange

shall be 13”. Overall height of the product (before pouring in the concrete) is 12.31”.

c. Play Product Interactivity: LED light is composed by 4 colors : red, green, blue and pure

warm white. All spectrum of colors from the 4 basic colors can be created. By default,

color sequence will use a random fade in / fade out effect, specific to each color group. But

client can request specific color sequence, for instance solid color for special days, or only

a limited range of colors.

2.03 SPLASH PAD COMMAND CENTER

A. 5 Valve Wall-Mounted Manifold (Quantity 1):

1. The Wall-Mounted Command Center shall be a pre-fabricated water distribution system

containing piping, valves and electrical wiring. It shall be factory assembled; water pressure

tested and shall be provided by the splash pad equipment manufacturer. It shall be equipped

with threaded connections for the water inlet and water outlets. The solenoid valves shall be

pre-wired to the controller.

2. Water Distribution Manifold: Shall be constructed of 2-inch diameter stainless steel structural

tubing with a powder coat painted finish. Each water distribution port shall be a 1-1/2-inch






NPT connection. The manifold shall be supplied with a pressure gauge. All welded joints shall

be water-tight and pressure tested to 150 psi.

3. Solenoid Valves: There shall be 1 solenoid valve installed on each of the water distribution

ports to the water play features. They shall be a normally closed 24 VAC 60 cycle solenoid

actuated globe/angle pattern design. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi.

The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of PVC with stainless steel fasteners. The

valve shall have a manual override capability (manual open/close control). It shall house a fully

encapsulated, 1-piece solenoid. Each solenoid valve shall have in integrated flow control

adjustment valve stem for fine tuning of spray effects.

4. Isolation Ball Valves: There shall be one isolation ball valve for each of the water distribution

ports mounted upstream from the solenoid valve. The valve body, stem, ball, and union shall

be constructed of PVC, which shall meet or exceed the requirements of 12454B according to

ASTM D1784. Ball seats shall be Teflon® backed by EPDM rubber O-rings. Seal material

shall be EPDM rubber. Valves shall be blocking in both directions and shall have union ends.

All valves shall have an expansion-compensating groove on the solid end. All valves shall be

pressure tested in both the open and closed positions and be rated at 232 psi.

5. Piping and Fittings: All piping and fittings shall be schedule 80 PVC. All factory-assembled

components, fitting, and connections shall be water pressure tested prior to delivery.

6. Electrical Enclosures, Conduit, Wiring, and Connections: All electrical wiring shall be #18

AWG with a 600V rating. All electrical connections, enclosures, and conduit shall be NEMA

4X watertight.

B. Splash Pad Controller (Quantity:1):

1. General

a. Controller shall be Maestro Controller and Light Controller manufactured by Vortex.

b. The Touch Pad programmable logic controller shall be sized according to the number of

outputs it is required to control. The programmable logic controller shall be factory

programmed with a variety of spray sequences designed according to the requirements of

the Project. It shall have the flexibility for the user to modify the sequences using either a

transportable memory cartridge or via the touch pad user interface.

c. A 24hr/7day user programmable agenda, which shall allow the user to set the operational

hours of the facility, shall be incorporated into the operating system. The time switch shall

have the ability to be programmed with a different time schedule for each day of the week,

and up to 2-time schedules per day.

d. The operating system shall be supplied with a touch pad user interface with controls for

each output, activation devices, and time switch. These selector settings allow the user to

select the operational mode of the components (i.e. Manual, Off, and Automatic).

e. The operating system shall have the capacity to receive signals from activation devices,

operating on 24VDC/VAC.

f. The operating system shall have the ability to automatically purge all water lines based on

the user selected time and duration (i.e. every day at 5 A.M. for 3 minutes). It shall also, be

configured to purge all lines after a user defined period of inactivity (i.e. after 4 hours of

inactivity).

g. Activation of activator shall initiate the splash pad programs.






h. Programming of the controller shall be done by the manufacturer and shall be approved by

the Owner/Engineer. The intent of the programming is to provide a level of randomness in

order to provide a surprise element for users as to what feature(s) will come on next. To

accomplish this programming shall be customizable involving multiple automated

sequences, with multiple steps of multiple duration. Each step for valves is programmed

either on or off. Each of the sequences shall be unique. The on and off times for each valve

shall be customized for the duration of the sequence. Each time the bollard activates the

controller the next programmed sequence will run. All the separate sequences shall run

before a sequence is repeated. The programming of the sequences shall be such that the

Owner can reprogram if they wish to do so. The supplier shall provide a minimum of five

(5) programs. The parameters of potential details of the programs shall be coordinated and

reviewed with the Engineer and Owner during construction and shall be approved by

Owner and Engineer prior to commissioning by the supplier and Contractor.

2. The Maestro control panel shall be housed in a corrosion resistant UL/CSA Certified, NEMA

4X rated enclosure.

3. The Maestro control panel shall be supplied with a 10-inch touch screen user interface with

controls for each output, activation device(s), and agenda. These selector settings allow the

user to select the operational mode of the components (i.e. Manual, Off and Automatic).

4. The operating system shall contain a 120V AC and 100VA to 350VA primary / 24 VAC

secondary or 240V AC and 100VA to 350VA primary / 24 VAC secondary transformers with

built- in electrostatic shield protection. Transformer’s power capacity shall vary according to

the Splashpad size. Contractor shall confirm with Engineer.

5. Controller shall control electrical solenoid valves for play features with a 24V AC max 250mA

signal.

6. The operating system shall also contain a universal input 85-264 VAC primary / 12 VDC and

12.5A secondary power supplies with built-in electrostatic shield protection.

7. Maestro control panel shall be protected by fuses sized according to voltage and transformer

size.

8. The Maestro control panel shall integrate digital outputs and digital inputs.

9. The Maestro control panel shall have the capacity to receive signals from activation devices or

sensors.

10. The Maestro control panel shall have capability to be interconnected with max 1 Ethernet

based item like the Maestro light controller by using an Ethernet RJ45 Cat5 cable. If more than

1 Ethernet based items need to be connected, an Ethernet switch junction box shall be used.

11. Maestro control panel shall have removable terminal blocks for easy wiring.

12. In case of emergency, pushing a button will power down the entire controller.

13. The Maestro firmware shall be factory programmed with spray sequences designed according

to the requirements of the project. Users shall have the flexibility to modify sequence duration

specifically to each operation schedule directly through the interface. New sequences (created

by Vortex) shall be added into the program using either a transportable USB Key or with an

internet connection. A 24hr/7day user programmable Agenda, which shall allow the user to set

the operational hours of the facility. Sequence quantity is not limited. For any further details

about user interface, please refer to the User Guide Manual provided by Vortex.

14. Operation schedule shall be set by week, day or by specific date (month and day number). For

all cases, schedule is set by hours in the day (start/end time). Operation schedule quantity is not

limited and all different schedules will be displayed in a paginated style.

15. The Maestro firmware operates in English, French and Spanish.






16. The Maestro firmware shall have the capacity to operate based on a programmed sequence.

17. The Maestro firmware shall have the ability to automatically purge all water lines based on the

user selected time and duration (i.e. every day at 5 am) It shall also, be configured to purge all

lines after a user defined period of inactivity (i.e. after 4 hours of inactivity).

18. The Maestro firmware in the interface lets the user modify easily the water consumption while

keeping the sequence capability.

19. Remote connection: System shall be capable with remote connection ability with operating

system connected to internet and also capable to have a future purchased manufacturer

available 3G Cellular Router for any 3G covered location.

a. With connectivity kit, Maestro Controller shall have the ability to be controlled remotely

through internet thanks to a 3G Cellular router. To perform this type of connection the area

where the Splashpad™ and Maestro controller needs to be covered by a local mobile phone

network.

b. The operating system shall have capability to be interconnected with any Maestro

Expansion, Maestro Light controller or Cellular Router by using Ethernet RJ45 Cat6

cables. Provided capability of 4 connections minimum.

20. Additional Controls.

a. All electrical equipment, including flow switches, shall be tested before delivery.

b. Controller shall control electrical solenoid valves for play features with a 24V AC max

1.6Amp signal with a total of 10Amp over all outputs with the included transformer.

21. Installation:

a. Electrical Connections: All main power electrical connections to the Splashpad Controller

are to be performed per local codes.

b. Drawings and Instructions: Product drawings and installation manuals shall be supplied by

the manufacturer for ease of installation.

C. LED Power Pack (Quantity:1):

1. General Materials Specifications:

a. Equipment Enclosure: Shall be made from corrosion resistant hot compression molded

fiberglass reinforced polyester which does not contain halogens. The enclosure shall be

capable of withstanding constant temperatures from -58°F up to 302° F and shall provide

indirect electrical contact protection for equipment and operators. Enclosures shall be UL

listed per UL Standard 508 for NEMA classification and CSA Certified per Standard C22.

2. LED Power Pack Controller:

a. The LED Power Pack Controller shall be housed in a corrosion resistant NEMA 4X rated

enclosure.

b. The LED Power Pack Controller receives signals from Maestro Controller through an

Ethernet wire. That controller is not a stand-alone unit and can’t be separated from the

Maestro main controller.






c. The LED Power Pack Controller can power multiple LEDs up to a maximum of 12 LED,

30W each, for a total of 360W.

d. A maximum of one LED shall be connected to each available outputs of the LED Power

Pack Controller. There are 12 different outputs in the LED Power Pack Controller.

e. The LED Power Pack Controller includes terminal for maximum gauge of 12 AWG for

wiring with LEDs lines.

f. Each output is a 5-conductor output: 2 conductors for power (PHASE / NEUTRAL), 1

conductor for grounding (GND) and 2 conductors for communication (DMX+ / DMX-).

g. Since DMX LEDs are addressed, each LED connected to the LED Power Pack Controller

can be independently controlled (= each LED can have its own color sequence).

h. Light sequences shall be designed according to the requirements of the project. The

sequence shall have the flexibility to be user modified using either a transportable USB

Key, or with an internet connection or via the Touch screen user interface.

i. Light sequences are fully synchronized with spray sequences. Same and unique user

interface is used on the touch screen of the Maestro.

j. A 24hr/7day user programmable agenda, which shall allow the user to set the operational

hours of the facility, shall be incorporated into the Maestro Controller. For any further

details about user interface, please refer to the manufacturer user guide manual.

k. Main Power: 120VAC 60Hz.

l. Power Supply: contains 2x300W UL LISTED Pool & Spa transformer supplying a 12-13-

14VAC 60Hz for powering connected LEDs.

m. DMX console: Ethernet to DMX console, 512 DMX channels max, 1A max @ 9-24VDC,

IP-20.

n. External enclosure dimension: refer to manufacturer installation drawing.

3. Installation Characteristics:

a. Electrical Connections: All main power electrical connections to the Maestro Controller

shall be meet applicable regulatory codes.

b. Drawings and Instructions: Product drawings and installation manuals shall be supplied by

the manufacturer for ease of installation.

c. As per Electrical Construction and Safety Codes: Controller and/or LED power panels

and/or any other electrical equipment shall be hard-wired to a ground fault circuit

interrupter (GFCI) from the input power source. All electrical work should be performed

by a license electrician in accordance to electrical construction and safety codes.

D. Piping: Requirements of Section 135213 shall apply to this Section.

E. Equipment and Piping Support:

1. All equipment and piping inside the splash pad equipment room shall be anchored and

supported (manifolds and headers, valves, and all other associated equipment inside the splash

pad equipment building).

2. All equipment mounting points shall be bolted to allow the removal and/or replacement of all

equipment.

F. Electrical Enclosures, Conduit, Wiring, and Connections: Shall comply to all local, State and

national regulation requirements.






2.04 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS

A. Pipe labeling: See Section 135213.

B. Pipe accessories: Provide all accessories, such as couplings for final pipe connections, between

different type of pipe materials, etc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT AND SPRAY FEATURES

A. Install operating equipment, piping, and fittings in accordance with component manufacturer’

instructions. Any changes that the manufacturer may require from the Contract Documents shall be

considered incidental and shall not be made without approval by the Owner/Engineer.

B. Install grounding and bonding of all products in accordance with applicable electrical codes, as

shown on the Drawings and per manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Contractor shall provide all items required to install equipment. The Contractor shall review the

wiring diagrams for the equipment actually furnished and modify and conform to the requirements

of the equipment furnished. The Contractor shall not be compensated for extra labor and materials

which are required to change wiring which was not confirmed with the equipment manufacturer’s

drawings.

D. Install accessories and fittings in accordance with component manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories required for mounting and anchoring equipment.

Anchorage system shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s specifications.

Consult with equipment manufacturer for length and installation of anchor bolts.

F. Contractor shall locate play feature bases from the information shown on the Drawings and from

the play feature manufacturer.

G. A factory-trained service person shall be present when the controls are put into service and shall

certify to the Owner and Engineer that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating

properly.

H. Contractor shall make all adjustments necessary to obtain proper operation of the controls. This

shall include but not limited to adjusting valve positions and controls, providing the necessary type

and quantity of wire connections to device contacts.

3.02 INSTALLATION – PIPING

A. Requirements of Section 135213 shall apply to this Section.


Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 - C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 - C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF-164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI - C1001301

SPLASH PAD PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES 131213 - 1

SECTION 131213 – SPLASH PAD PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Piping, fittings, hardware, valves, supports, accessories, etc. All items shall be constructed of materials compatible for long term use (interior and exterior) for splash pads.

2. Related Requirements:

a) All requirements of Section 131113 – Splash Pad General shall apply to this Section.

1.02 USE OF CITY WATER SYSTEM

A. Any water use for the project shall be coordinated and approved by the Owner.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Warranty with 2-year correction period from the actual Substantial Completion Date shall apply to all work of this Section, unless otherwise stated for a longer period for specific items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PVC PIPING

A. Piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC unless noted otherwise. Fittings shall be Schedule 80 injection molded. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2467 and ANSI/NSF Standard 61.

2.02 HDPE PIPING

A. HDPE piping shall be provided for the supply to the splash pad spray features and winterization drain lines to drain manhole. Pipe material shall be DR13.5 or DR11, high-density virgin polyethylene, PE4710 resin, and shall conform to ASTM 3350 (Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings). Minimum density of piping shall be 58 lbs/ft3. Maximum working pressure rating shall be at minimum 160 psi. Piping and fittings shall be listed for potable water service by the National Sanitation foundation (NSF).

B. All piping connections shall be by fusion welding. Welds shall be performed on the Site by personnel fully trained and experienced in the required procedures.

C. Fitting Materials:

1. Material shall be high-density virgin polyethylene using PE4710 resin and shall conform to ASTM 3350 (Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings).

2. Butt Heat Fusion Fittings shall conform to ASTM D3261.



3. Socket-Type fittings shall conform to ASTM 2683. 4. All fittings shall be manufactured, not field/shop fabricated. 5. Minimum density of fitting material shall be 58 lbs/ft3. 6. Maximum working pressure rating shall be at minimum equal to the rating of the pipe. 7. Contractor shall provide connection transition fittings between components of different

material, i.e. HDPE piping and steel/PVC piping/etc. and to equipment/valves/etc. Transition fittings shall have a maximum working pressure rating at minimum equal to the rating of the pipe. Fittings shall be compression/threaded type, constructed completely with non-metallic/stainless steel materials. Basis of Design Products: Poly-Cam (763) 786-6682 or Central Plastics (800) 654-3872.

2.03 PIPING GENERAL

A. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers

1. The Contractor shall furnish and install red colored plastic ribbon tape and placed 6 inches above the top of the splash pad supply and drain piping. The plastic ribbon tape shall be continuously printed tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

2. Approved manufacturers include: W.H. Brady, Marketing Systems Inc., MSI, Seton Identification Products.

B. All pipes shall be installed to drain and shall be provided with drain valves at low points for convenient draining and winterizing.

2.04 WATER SERVICE PIPING

A. See DIVISION 22 for related items.

2.05 MANHOLE

A. See DIVISION 33 for the precast manhole structure used for winterization of splash pad supply lines. Information shown on the splash pad drawings shall be coordinated with project civil drawings.

2.06 VALVES

A. Valves and fittings shall be NSF approved.

B. Basis of Design ball valves: Hayward PVC true-union valves. Provide with extension stems and hand wheel actuators where shown on the Drawings.

2.07 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION:

A. Pipe Identification

1. Non-buried piping shall receive pipe markers as specified below. 2. Shall comply with State and other regulatory requirements. 3. Shall identify conveyed fluid; identify where flow is going and direction of flow.



4. Markers shall conform to ANSI and OSHA requirements for marker size, marker color, and legend size and color.

B. Valve Tags: All valves shall be tagged with brass, non-ferrous metal or plastic laminated tags wired to the valve stem or otherwise attached to the valve being tagged. Fasteners shall be non-ferrous or otherwise corrosion-proof. Numbering shall match the schedule in the Contractor provided splash pad O&M Manual.

2.08 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, BRACKETS, ETC.

A. Approved Manufacturers: Grinnell, Crane, Uni-Strut or approved equal.

B. Piping supports shall be located to minimize impact to access of equipment and suitable for the structural systems they are supported from.

C. Hangers, supports, brackets, etc. shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant materials and or painted/galvanized to provide corrosion resistance. In wet locations such as water tank, and in buried and exterior areas, provide stainless steel supports and accessories. In addition to piping supports, provide additional supports as required for valves, valve extension stems, gauges, equipment, etc.

D. Additional cross bracing shall be provided to securely support piping, prevent sway, vibration transmission, etc.

E. At drainage manhole, all penetrations shall be made watertight and all supports, fasteners, etc. shall be stainless steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. All equipment and piping shall be neatly arranged in an orderly manner for ease of operation and maintenance. Arrangement shall be as shown on the Drawings with minor deviations allowed where required for the size and configuration of the specific items of equipment to be used.

B. All work shall be performed by skilled workmen experienced in splash pad/pool construction. All piping shall be neatly laid out and installed in accordance with the best construction practices. Care shall be taken to place all piping true to line and grade. All piping shall be pitched to drain to low points and be provided with convenient drain valves.

C. Pipe testing. Contractor shall give Owner/Design Team adequate notice when pipe testing will be done so that Owner or other Owner representative can witness the testing. Written certification of pipe testing shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer.

D. PVC piping shall be pressure tested to not less than twice its operating pressure (with a minimum of 30 psi) for a minimum of 30 minutes with no drop in pressure and shall be totally without leakage.

E. Polyethylene Piping Pressure Tests:



1. Piping shall be pressure tested before covering piping with granular fill and concrete. Provide shutoffs at play features as needed to complete pressure testing.

2. Testing Procedure:

a) Fill the piping system with water and bleed off any trapped air. b) Apply a pressure of 60 psig to the entire piping system over a period of 3 hours. Add

water to the system on an hourly basis to maintain the test pressure. c) After testing preparation is complete, maintain a pressure of 60 psig over a 3-hour

period. Water shall not be added during this step. d) After the 3-hour testing period, drop the test pressure to 50 psig for 1 hour. The

pressure shall then remain within 5 percent of the target pressure to indicate no leakage in the system.

e) After the testing has been witnessed and approved, relieve pressure from the system. f) Before covering piping with granular borrow and concrete, the system shall be

pressurized to 50 psig and maintained at that pressure during placement of sand or concrete to provide visible evidence that the piping has not been damaged due to the placement process.

g) Pressure shall not continuously be applied to the system for more than 8 hours at 1.5 times the system pressure rating.

F. Piping Support: Non-buried piping shall be installed with or supports per the pipe size and spacing chart below. Provide additional supports near equipment to support piping. All piping shall be supported in such a way to eliminate swaying and vibration transmission. Provide cross-bracing supports as required.

Pipe Size (inches)

Maximum Spacing

¼ 3.5 3/8 4 ½ 4.5 ¾ 4.5 1 5 1-1/4 5.5 1-1/2 5.5 2 5.5 2-1/2 6.5 3 7 3-1/2 7 4 7 5 7.5 6 8



Pipe Size (inches)

Maximum Spacing

8 8.5 10 9 12 10.5 14 11 16 11.5

G. Pipe Identification: Place flow direction arrows at each pipe identification point. Pipe identification shall be placed as follows:

1. Pipe identification shall be provided on all branch lines of all header pipes and at each change of direction.

2. Pipe identification shall be provided on all header lines between branches. 3. In no case, on all other piping, shall pipe identification exceed 20-foot spacing.

H. Identify valves with tags bearing system identification and a valve sequence number. Provide a computer written valve schedule indicating the valve number and the equipment or areas supplied by each valve. Locate the schedule in room and in each Operation and Maintenance Manual. Schedules in mechanical rooms shall be framed in clear plastic and be conspicuously posted.

I. The Contractor shall install all necessary piping in general accordance with the Drawings.

J. All piping shall be pitched to provide positive gravity drainage of the entire system for winterization.

K. Pipe bedding shall be as shown on the Drawings. The bedding shall be such that a uniform bearing and support is provided at the required line and grade on a solid bottom at every point along the pipe.

L. Special care shall be taken to ensure that all backfill material be free of debris which could damage piping.

M. The pipe interior must be kept clean before being installed

N. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Equipment and features shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of work the fittings, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly clean and adjusted for proper operation.

O. All piping must be properly supported.

3.02 BURIED PIPING

A. Trench Excavation:



1. Contractor shall dig the trench to the alignment shown on the Drawings. The trench shall be sufficiently straight to permit the pipe to be laid true to line in the approximate location of the trench as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Contractor shall excavate, brace, sheet, and drain the trench so that workers may work safely and efficiently therein as required by OSHA Regulations.

3. Contractor shall discharge dewatering pumps to the natural drainage channels. 4. The trench width may vary and will depend upon the depth the trench, the diameter and

number of pipes to be laid, and the nature of the material to be excavated. Trench widths, side slopes, and trench bracing and sheeting shall conform to the regulations of OSHA and appropriate state and local agencies.

B. Preparation of Trench Bottom:

1. The trench shall not have standing water when trench bottom is prepared or when pipe is laid.

2. Excavate bell or flange holes if so required, so that after placement only the barrel of the pipe receives bearing pressure from the trench bottom and the pipe is true to line and grade.

C. Pipe Bedding Material shall be granular material complying with the following:

1. Material shall consist of sand and sand-gravel, free of debris, salvaged concrete, salvaged bituminous mixture, large boulders, clay, or silt. All material shall pass the 1-inch sieve and shall conform to the following gradation requirements:

Sieve Size Percent Passing #4 35 to 100 #10 20 to 80 #40 5 to 35 #200 0-5

D. Pipe Laying:

1. Pipe shall be carefully lowered into trench piece by piece in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings. Under no circumstances shall pipe materials be dumped into the trench.

2. Before lowering and while suspended, inspect the pipe for defects and coating damage. Any defective, damaged, or unsound pipe shall be rejected and removed from the Project Site.

3. Remove all foreign matter or dirt from the inside of the pipe before it is lowered into its position in the trench and keep the pipe clean by approved means during and after laying.

4. Bed every pipe uniformly throughout its entire length.

E. Backfill at and above Pipe Zone:

1. Contractor shall place granular backfill the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench in 6-inch lifts to a point 12” above the pipe.



2. Compact bedding and backfill materials by mechanical means to a density equal to or greater than 98 percent of Standard Proctor Density Test, except to 100 percent of Standard Proctor Density in the upper 3-feet from the surface.






ICE RINK GENERAL 131800 - 1

SECTION 131800 - ICE RINK GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. All necessary and incidental labor and materials for the construction and installation of a

fully operable refrigerated ice rink system, including portable ice rink floor, permanent air-

cooled scroll water chiller plant, portable and permanent refrigeration piping, electrical,

freeze-in perimeter railings, and other related items as specified in related Sections. This

Section outlines only the general requirements of the Contractor. Detailed materials and

installation requirements are included in later Sections of this Specification.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Conditions of the Contract, Supplemental Conditions, and Division 01 – General

Requirements.

2. Section 131813.02 - Ice Rink Floor – Portable Surface.

3. Section 131814.02 – Ice Rink Refrigeration General

4. Section 131814.05 – Premanufactured Air-Cooled Chiller

5. Sections 131814.15 through 131814.18 – Ice System Component Specification

Sections

6. Sections 131815.01 through 131815.08 – Ice System Electrical Specification

Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. The Ice System Contractor shall submit complete Shop Drawings for all equipment

and materials to the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation.

2. All submittals shall be in conformance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. Provide complete fabrication Shop drawings of the entire system, accessories, and

equipment.

C. Literature and Drawings, including dimensions, weights, required electrical wiring, control

diagrams.

D. Recommendations, procedures, and requirements for coordination with the work of other

trades on the Project, complete wiring, piping, and control diagrams covering field

installation.

1.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS






A. Submit three copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer for review.

All three copies will be retained for the Engineer and Owner’s use.

B. Assemble material in three ring or post binders, using an index at the front of each volume,

and tabs for each system or type of equipment. In addition to the data indicated in the

Division 01 – General Requirements, include the following information:

1. Copies of all approved shop drawings.

2. Manufacturer’s wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment.

3. Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements.

4. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies.

5. Temperature control record drawings and control sequences.

6. Parts lists for manufactured equipment.

7. Valve schedules, including numbers and description of each valve referenced to an

attached Drawing.

8. Lubrication instructions, including numbers and description of each valve referenced

to an attached Drawing.

9. Warranties.

10. Manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance and operations for each piece of

equipment.

11. Spare parts list.

12. Narrative on controls.

13. Start-up and shut-down procedures.

14. Trouble shooting information.

15. Additional information as indicated in the other Sections of the Construction

Standards.

1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain record drawings on originals prepared by the installing Contractor/ subcontractors.

Include copies of these record drawings with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.


A. Contractor shall have responsible design and construction personnel with a minimum ten

years experience on comparable projects. Experienced personnel shall always be present on

the project site when construction activities are occurring.

Contractor shall provide the Engineer a listing of comparable projects and certified evidence

of at least three installations similar to these Specifications that have been operating for a

minimum of three years. This list shall include the names of the rinks, locations, Owner

and/or Engineer, and the names of operating personnel who can give accurate data on the

operating history of the system. This information shall be reviewed and approved by the

Engineer prior to award of the Construction Contract. Similar, comparable projects shall

include as a minimum:

1. Portable surface rink floor using polyethylene tubing and PVC headers.






2. Commercial quality refrigeration chiller plant including R-410A refrigerant, scroll

compressors, plate to plate evaporator, air cooled condenser, and integral pump package.

B. Codes: All labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances furnished and installed by

the Contractor shall be in accordance with the latest published codes applicable to the Ice

System Installation, including the following:

1. International Building Code.

2. International Plumbing Code.

3. International Electrical Code.

4. International Mechanical Code and International Fire Code.

5. OSHA.

6. ANSI/ASHRAE Standards 15 and 34, most current versions.

7. American Standard Code of Refrigeration Piping ASA B31.5.

8. American Standard Code for Pressure Piping ASA B31.1.

9. American Standard Code for Pressure Vessels.

10. Applicable local codes and ordinances for the State of New York.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide a two-year materials and labor warranty on all work, in addition

to all extended equipment warranties provided by the equipment manufacturers.

B. Start-up and shut-down service shall be provided as outlined in Part 3 of this Specification.


A. The Contractor shall deliver all materials and equipment to the Project Site and shall be

responsible for storage and security of all materials and equipment.

B. Store all materials off the ground and covered to avoid any damage by atmospheric

conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings for this

Project and as required to provide a complete and working system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTIONS

A. Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of five days in advance of all required

inspections. The Engineer will furnish a listing of required inspections at the pre-

construction conference.






3.2 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Contractor shall provide initial install of the temporary rink floor and perimeter railings.

B. After pipe testing has been approved and the system has been thoroughly flushed, the chilled

secondary refrigeration system shall be completely charged with the specified 40%

propylene glycol brine solution. All free air shall be removed from the piping systems

through venting and any necessary vacuum pumping. The Contractor shall be responsible

for venting any free air from the systems for a period of two months after system startup.

C. Furnish a complete charge of R-410A refrigerant for the primary refrigeration system, plus

any additional necessary to make up for any leaks to place this system into a leak-tight, oil-

free, operating condition for the entire period of warranty.

D. Provide the service of a factory-trained technician for 40 hours to completely check out

mechanical unit operation.

E. Start refrigeration system and cool rink floor down to operating temperature over a 24 to 48-

hour period.

F. Provide all necessary labor and materials to build first ice sheet, including painting with

white ice paint.

G. Provide Owner's operating personnel with 24 hours of hands-on instructions.

H. Review operation and maintenance material with Owner and Staff at time of instructions.

I. All system startup procedures described in this Section shall be provided prior to the

specified project substantial completion date.

3.3 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN

A. Contractor shall provide system shutdown service following the first ice season. Contractor

shall coordinate shut-down date with the Owner.

B. Provide Owner's operating personnel with 16 hours of hands on instruction on shutdown

procedures. Shutdown services to be provided shall include:

1. Turn off all equipment components.

2. Move all R-410A refrigerant into the receiver vessel and close valves to isolate from

system.

3. Lubricate all equipment.

4. Inspect all equipment, and repair or replace defective components.

5. Check all fluid levels and fill to proper operating levels if necessary.

6. Remove ice from rink floor. Remove all portable rink floor materials, railing

components, and heat transfer fluids and load into ice resurfacer room storage area

furnished by the Owner.






3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Contractor shall provide a second season refresher startup including a review of the rink

setup and the essential startup requirements for the refrigeration system.

B. Provide 16 hours of hands on instruction.

C. Owner to schedule the startup with the ice rink contractor.

3.5 PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall be required to apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits necessary for

the completion of the work.






ICE RINK FLOOR – PORTABLE SURFACE 131813.02 - 1

SECTION 131813.02 - ICE RINK FLOOR – PORTABLE SURFACE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Portable rink floor materials.

B. Floor design and installation requirements.

C. Insulation and poly liner.



1. Conditions of the Contract, Supplemental Conditions, and Division 01 – General

Requirements.

2. Section 131800 - Ice Rink General.



5. Sections 131814.15 through 131814.18 – Ice System Component Specification

Sections

6. Sections 131815.01 through 131815.08 – Ice System Electrical Specification

Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, product data sheets, and samples of the leveling sand, insulation, piping,

tubing, headers, spacers, and poly liner shall be submitted as required in Section 131800 - Ice

Rink General.


A. Shall be as required in Section 131800 - Ice Rink General.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RINK FLOOR PIPING SYSTEM

A. Removable rink piping system shall be Icemat II as provided by Calmac Manufacturing

Corporation or approved equal.






B. Removable headers shall be Schedule 80 PVC, with grooved ends for groove lock fittings.

Header diameter shall be as shown on the drawings. Nominal length of each header section

shall be 7’-0”, although other section lengths may be required to meet special project

requirements.

C. Tubing shall be medium density polyethylene, 0.500” I.D., 0.625” O.D., spaced at 1.500” on

center with 1.250” height stiff plastic spacer strips. Tubing lengths shall be custom cut to fit

the dimensions of the rink. Return u-bends shall be copper, radius bent to provide 1.500”

pipe spacing.

D. Working pressure rating shall be minimum 90 psi.

E. All tubing connections to headers or return bends shall use stainless steel clamps.

Connections shall be performed at the production plant or on the project site by personnel

fully trained and experienced in the required procedures.

F. The entire Icemat II system shall carry a manufacturer’s warranty for three years from initial

startup.

2.3 POLY LINER

A. Material shall be clear 6 mil thickness polyethylene sheeting. Provide in rolls of maximum

width and length to minimize seams. Supply with compatible poly tape for taping holes and

all seams.

2.4 INSULATED RINK BASE

A. 4” Insulation panels will be laid down over the concrete plaza deck. Panels around the

perimeter of the rink plaza would be custom cut to fit the geometry of the rink perimeter.

Over the insulation would be one layer of ¾” plywood panels also custom cut to fit the

perimeter geometry of the rink. The insulation and plywood would be fabricated in an

integrated sandwich panel and shall be custom fabricated to conform to the project

conditions including the tapered insulated panels to accommodate the drainage slopes in the

plaza, providing a level surface at the top of the plywood panel. Panels shall consist of

extruded insulation with weather treated plywood adhered to the top surface. Panel nominal

size shall be 4’-0” x 8’-0”. Panel thickness shall vary as shown on the drawing details. Panels

shall be cut to conform to radiused rink edges and to span over base irregularities such as

slope drainage surface of the plaza. All panels shall include permanent markings to allow

placement at the proper location each year.

B. Insulation Material: Extruded polystyrene, Dow SM ASTM C578-85, Type IV, or equal.

C. Plywood: Shall be exterior grade, APA Grade C-D Plugged, Exposure 1, exterior glue,

sanded surface, in thicknesses as shown on the drawing details. Plywood shall be pressure

treated to 0.40 PCF to resist moisture degradation, using Alkaline Copper Quaternary

(ACQ), Copper Azole, Type A (CBA-A), or Sodium Borate (SBX).






D. Adhesive: Shall be exterior cold temperature grade construction adhesive compatible with

the materials to be bonded.

2.5 PLAZA TRENCH COVERS

A. The plaza trench covers, provided by Others, are designed to accommodate vehicle traffic

including the loads of an ice resurfacer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of five days in advance of the covering

of any surface or rink refrigeration pipe or tubing so that necessary inspections can be

accomplished. The Engineer’s authorized representative must have inspected, witnessed

pressure testing, and approved all piping systems prior to installing header covers or creating

the first ice sheet.

3.3 INSULATED RINK BASE SANDWICH PANELS

A. Sandwich panels shall be constructed and installed as indicated on the Drawings by

mechanics skilled in the trade. Panels shall be installed after all plaza drainage trench covers

are installed, after perimeter railings are erected.

B. Panels shall not be mechanically fastened to the plaza floor.

C. All panel sections shall include permanent markings to allow placement at the proper

location each year. A plan shall be prepared for the Owner’s future use documenting

installed location of each numbered panel.

D. Edges of panels shall be cleanly cut to conform to the perimeter railing bases and tower base

with a maximum tolerance of ½”.

3.4 RINK FLOOR HEADERS AND TUBING

A. Header piping and tubing shall be installed as shown on the drawing details. Floor tubing

shall be installed after installation of insulated sandwich panels, and after poly liner is

installed over the sandwich panels.

B. Where tubing gaps wider than 2” are encountered at the rink perimeter or other locations,

additional piping runs shall be added in the field.

C. Tolerance: Top surface of all refrigerant piping shall be within +/- 1/4 inch of the elevation

shown on the Drawings.

D. Sand shall not be placed over the surface of the rink tubing.






E. After all headers and tubing are in place, fill the floor with the specified polypropylene water

mixture, circulate to remove air, and then pressure test the system. Pressure test shall be to

minimum 60 PSI for a 2-hour period, then to 75 PSI for 10 minutes, with no pressure loss.

All connections and fittings shall be soap tested while under pressure to further ensure no

leaks are present.






ICE RINK REFRIGERATION GENERAL 131814.01 - 1

SECTION 131814.01 - ICE RINK REFRIGERATION GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. System Description: Furnish and install ice rink refrigeration equipment to include an air-

cooled chiller plant, permanent refrigeration brine piping, temporary ice rink floor header

and rink piping system, temporary freeze-in perimeter railing system, and all related controls,

electrical interconnections, and miscellaneous piping for a complete and operating ice rink

refrigeration system.

B. General Design Criteria.

C. Control Design Criteria.

D. R-410A Refrigerant Charge.

E. Propylene Glycol Brine Charge.

F. Telephone Dialer.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Refrigeration System Design Criteria:

1. Pipe sizing for the refrigeration system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor,

unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. The piping shall be sized so as not to

reduce the capacity or efficiency of the system below specified design criteria.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating isolation and service valves adjacent

to all components that require service, regardless of whether they are shown on the

Drawings.

3. The Contractor shall provide a prefabricated air-cooled chiller plant complete with a

brine pumping assembly. All refrigeration equipment shall be located outside on a

prefabricated chiller skid. Steel skid framing components shall be designed by the

Manufacturer and shall be sized to handle assembly, shipping, installation, and

equipment operation forces. Skids shall be sized for delivery and location as shown

on the plans.

4. General Design Criteria Summary:

Rink Surface Area 9,960 SF

Refrigeration Tonnage 96.9 tons

Rink Surface per Ton Refrigeration 102.7 SF/Ton

Saturated Evaporator Temp. -1.13º F.

Saturated Condensing Temp. 84.46º F.

Primary Refrigerant R-410A

Secondary Refrigerant 40% Propylene Glycol Brine

Evaporative Brine Leaving Temperature 10.0º F






Evaporative Brine Entering Temperature 15.0º F

No. Scrolling Compressors 6

No. Equal Size Secondary Refrigerant Pumps 2 Note: One pump is backup.

Refrigerant Pump Capacities (2) @ 513gpm each Full Flow

Refrigerant Pump H.P. (2) 25 H.P.

Electrical Characteristics Required 460/3/60

Nominal Size Rink Floor Piping 5/8 Inch O.D.

Type of Rink Piping Medium Density Polyethylene

Pipe Spacing 1.5 Inches O.C. Max.

B. Ice System Control Design Criteria:

1. Sequence of Operation: Refrigeration system shall automatically control the ice rink

temperature to an adjustable return brine set-point temperature. In general,

compressors will be controlled by the return brine temperature, the air-cooled

condenser VFD fans by compressor discharge pressure, the brine pump speed by

temperature differential.

2. The condensing pressure shall be controlled by adjusting the quantity and speed of

the air-cooled fans.

3. Two equal size brine secondary refrigerant pumps are to be utilized in the system.

Brine temperature supplied and returned from the rink floor shall be measured, and

the pump variable speed drives shall be controlled to automatically increase speed

with increased temperature differential and decrease speed with decreased

temperature differential. Minimum pump flow shall be 240 GPM in any case, and

pumps shall reach full flow of 513gpm whenever the temperature differential

exceeds 5.0 degrees F. Each pump is sized for the full flow rate of the system.

Simultaneous operation of both pumps is not required. Brine pumps shall be

operated as lead lag to provide equal wear to each pump. System shall be designed

with the option to have the Operator manually control which pump operates.

C. Motor Efficiencies:

1. All motors greater than 1 H.P. shall have a minimum NEMA MG1-12.53a nominal

efficiency, in percent, which meets or exceeds the requirements of Section 13 18

15.04 - Ice System – Motors.



1. Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 - General Requirements.


3. Section 131813.02 – Ice Rink Floor – Portable Surface.






4. Section 131814.05 – Premanufactured Air-Cooled Chiller.

5. Sections 131814.15 through 131814.18 – Ice System Component Specifications.

6. Sections 131815.01 through 131815.08 – Ice System Electrical Specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and/or all equipment and

materials as required in Section 131800 - Ice Rink General.

1.5 WARRANTY/SERVICE

A. The ice system refrigeration package as outlined in the Specifications shall have:

1. Full parts and Labor warranty for whole unit for one year from start-up.

2. Parts warranty less compressor for year two.

3. Compressor parts from year two through year five.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL

A. Shall be provided by the chiller manufacturer and installed by the Ice System Contractor.

B. The electrical control panel shall be incorporated into the air-cooled chiller skid and contain

motor starters and feeders for all refrigeration system components. Each starter shall be

furnished with a run light and auxiliary contacts as required. All power wiring and conduit

for all refrigeration equipment that is not included in the Chiller Skid shall be provided by

the Contractor. All control wiring and related conduit between the electrical control panel

and devices, including but not limited to the pumps, compressors, control system, solenoid

valves, pressure switches, and sensors shall be designed by the Air-Cooled Chiller

Manufacturer.

C. The electrical panel shall comply with all applicable sections of Sections 131815.01 through

131815.08 – Ice System Electrical.

D. Finish shall be white enamel inside and gray prime outside over phosphatized surfaces.

Exterior finish coat color to be as provided by the manufacturer.

E. The refrigeration controls shall be incorporated in the electrical control panel and include the

following:






1. Running Lights for:

Brine Pumps (2)

Compressors (2)

2. Floor temperature monitor (1).

3. Control Switches for:

Brine Pumps (2 - On/Off/Automatic)

Compressors (2 –Off/Automatic)

4. Low brine temperature safety cutout controller.

5. Isolated alarm contact for high return brine temperature. Alarm level shall be

operator adjustable. An automatic dialer device shall be provided to alert the system

operators of a high brine temperature condition.

6. The telephone dialer.

2.2 PUSH BUTTON DEVICES

A. Heavy duty, oiltight, 30.5 mm with NEMA A600 contacts; Allen-Bradley 800T, General

Electric CR104P, Square D Class 9001 Type K, Westinghouse PB1 line, or equal.

B. Green start operators.

C. Red stop operators.

D. Knob lever selector switch operators.

E. Transformer type indicating lights with red lens.

2.3 LOW BRINE TEMPERATURE SAFETY CUTOUT:

A. Penn A19ABC-36 as manufactured by Johnson Controls, or approved equal.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. All equipment and devices shall be identified with laminated plastic nameplates, with white

lettering of not less than 3/16-inch height on a black background. Nameplates shall be

attached with screws or adhesive. Field mounted equipment such as transmitters and sensors

shall be identified with stamped brass tags.

2.5 REFRIGERANT CHARGE

A. Provide operating charge of R-410A primary refrigerant. Operating charge shall be defined

to be the recommended operating charge for the chiller, condenser, all liquid and suction

lines, the compressors.

2.6 CIRCULATION FLUID

A. The secondary refrigerant circulation fluid shall be a 40% solution propylene glycol and

water.






B. The fluid shall be an industrial heat transfer fluid specifically designed for use in HVAC

systems.

C. The fluid shall contain an organic corrosion inhibitor at a dosage rate as recommended by the

inhibitor supplier.

D. Fluid properties of the 40 % propylene glycol/water mix shall conform to the following:

Freezing point -6° F.

pH 7.5 to 8.0

Specific gravity 1.04 @ 50º F.

Weight 8.7 lbs/gal @ 50º F.

E. The water used to mix the solution shall contain no more than 100 ppm calcium carbonate

hardness, 50 ppm calcium plus magnesium ions, or 50 ppm chloride plus sulfate ions.

F. A tag shall be attached near the system fill point containing the following information:

Date of original system charge.

Descriptions of fluid including manufacturer’s name, address, and phone numbers.

Freezing point.

Total system gallons.

Reference to Material Safety Data Sheet.

G. Provide testing agency certification of the above mixture.

2.7 TELEPHONE DIALER

A. Provide an automatic telephone dialer system to remotely alert facility operators of any of

four refrigeration system failure alarms (high return brine temperature, AC power failure,

plus one future input).

B. Manufacturer: Sensaphone, Inc. Model 1104.

C. Dialer system shall include AC/DC transformer and automatic 9-volt battery backup system.

D. Dialer shall be capable of dialing, in series, a minimum of 4 selectable telephone numbers

and delivering recorded messages to any answered number. Dialer shall continue to attempt

calls to each number until the call is answered and acknowledged.

E. Dialer shall operate using a standard non-dedicated telephone line connection. The Owner

will make any interconnections into the telephone system and will pay any monthly

telephone service fees.






2.9 SIGNAGE

A. Refrigeration system signage shall be provided in conformance with the International

Mechanical Code, the International Fire Code, ASHRAE 15, and NFPA 704. Signs to be

provided shall include, but not be limited to:

1. System Description Signs indicating the name and address of the installer,

refrigerant number and amount of refrigerant, the lubricant identity and amount, and

the field test pressure applied. Sign shall be mounted adjacent to the doorway into

the Equipment Room.

2. System Warning sign reading “Machinery Area – Authorized Personnel Only.

3. Emergency shutdown procedures, including precautions to be observed in case of a

breakdown, shall be displayed. The precautions shall address instructions for

shutting down the system in case of emergency, the name, address, and day/night

telephone numbers for obtaining service, and the name, address, and day/night

telephone numbers of all city agencies to be contacted. Sign shall be mounted

adjacent to the doorway or gate into the Equipment Area.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean equipment of all temporary protective coatings and foreign materials prior

to assembly or erection. Clean external surfaces or erected equipment of oil, grease, dirt, or

other foreign material.

B. Touch up paint, primer, and filler as required on all equipment and vessels.

3.2 VIBRATION

A. All pumps, compressors, and motors shall be designed and furnished such that the finished

installation operates within acceptable vibration limits. No excess vibration shall be allowed

for any possible operating condition.

B. If the amount of the equipment vibration is in question, the Contractor shall be responsible

for hiring an experienced vibration company, Electrical Mechanical Services, General

Electric, or approved equal to perform vibration testing. A certified test report shall be

submitted to the Engineer, including complete test results, calculations, and sketches of

locations of field measurements.

C. If the certified test results do not indicate compliance with the manufacturer’s recommended

limitations and industry standards, the Contractor shall be responsible for correcting the

problem by whatever means necessary. Modifications proposed shall be submitted for

approval. No additional payment will be made for modifying the equipment to meet the

vibration requirements.






3.5 SYSTEM STARTUP/SHUTDOWN

A. Shall be provided as specified in Section 131800 – Ice Rink General.






PREMANUFACTURED AIR-COOLED CHILLER 131814.05 - 1

SECTION 131814.05 – PREMANUFACTURED AIR-COOLED CHILLER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes design, performance criteria, refrigerants, controls, and installation

requirements for air-cooled rotary scroll packaged chillers.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. AHRI 550/590 - Standard for Water Chilling Packages using the Vapor Compression

Cycle

B. AHRI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Equipment

C. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

D. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings

E. UL 1995 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners

F. ASTM B117 - Standard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing

G. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

H. ASTM A525 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Sheet Steel Products

I. ASTM D1654 - Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens, Subjected to Corrosive

Environments

J. ANSI/AFBMA 9-1978 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

K. ISO 9001

L. California Administrative Code - Title 24

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit dimensional plan and elevation view drawings, weights and loadings, required

clearances, location and size of all field connections, electrical requirements and wiring

diagrams.

B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, accessories and any special data.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. Comply with codes and standards specified.






B. Chiller must be built in an ISO 9001 classified facility.

1.05 VERIFICATION OF CAPACITY AND EFFICIENCY

A. All proposals for chiller performance must include an AHRI approved selection

method. Verification of date and version of computer program selection or catalog is

available through AHRI.

1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and

transporting chillers.

B. Chiller shall be capable of withstanding -40⁰F (-40⁰C) to 158⁰F (70⁰C) storage

temperatures for an indefinite period of time.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment,

whichever occurs first.

B. Year 2 parts warranty less compressor

C. 2nd-5th yr. compressor parts

D. 1st year labor warranty whole unit

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Trane model ACS

B. Approved equals [manufactures name here], must have scroll compressor and meet the

specification including all scheduled performance.

2.02 CHILLER DESCRIPTION

A. The contractor shall furnish and install air-cooled water chiller with scroll compressors

as shown as scheduled on the contract documents. The chillers shall be installed in

accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

2.03 CHILLER OPERATION

A. Low ambient operation: Chiller shall be able to start and operate in ambient conditions

down to -20⁰F (-29⁰C) and up to 115⁰F (46⁰C). Low ambient operation is accomplished

with factory installed and tested protection. If field installed low ambient solution is

used this shall be purchased and installed at contractor expense.

B. Low leaving fluid operation: Chiller shall be capable of low temperature process

operation with a leaving solution temperature less than 40⁰F (4⁰C).






C. Chiller shall be capable of starting up with 95⁰F (35⁰C) entering fluid temperature to

the evaporator. Maximum water temperature that can be circulated with the Chiller not

operating is 125⁰F (52⁰C)

D. Chiller shall provide evaporator freeze protection and low limit control to avoid low

evaporator refrigerant temperature trip-outs during critical periods of chiller operation.

Whenever this control is in effect, the controller shall indicate that the chiller is in

adaptive limit. If the condition exists for more than 30 seconds, a limit warning alarm

relay shall energize.

E. Rapid Restart™ after power restoration. The Chiller shall be capable of starting in 45

seconds.

2.04 COMPRESSORS

A. Construct chiller using fully hermetic scroll type compressors with R410A optimized

and dedicated scroll profile.

B. Provide direct drive motor cooled by suction gas with only three major moving parts

and a completely enclosed compression chamber which leads to increased efficiency.

C. Each compressor shall have Intermediate Discharge Valves (IDV) or variable volume

ratio technology

D. Each compressor shall have overload protection internal to the compressor

E. Each compressor shall include: centrifugal oil pump, oil level sight glass and oil

charging valve

F. Each compressor will have crankcase heaters installed and properly sized to minimize

the amount of liquid refrigerant present in the oil sump during off cycles.

2.05 EVAPORATOR

A. The evaporator shall be a high efficiency, brazed plate-to-plate type heat exchanger

consisting of parallel plates. Braze plates shall be stainless steel with copper braze

material.

B. The water side working pressure shall be rated at 150 psig (10.3 bar) and tested at 1.5

times maximum allowable water side working pressure.

C. The refrigerant side working pressure shall be rated at 460 psig (29.6 bars) and tested at

1.1 maximum allowable refrigerant side working pressure.

D. Insulate the evaporator with a minimum of 0.75-inch (K=0.28) UV rated insulation. If

the insulation is field installed, the additional money to cover material and installation

costs in the field should be included in the bid.






E. Evaporator heaters shall be factory installed and shall protect chiller down to -20⁰F (-

29⁰C). Contractor shall wire separate power to energize heat tape and protect

evaporator while chiller is disconnected from the main power.

F. Provide water drain connection, vent and fittings. Factory installed leaving water

temperature control and low temperature cutout sensors.

G. Water connections shall be grooved pipe.

H. Proof of flow shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer, mechanically installed

and electrically wired, at the factory of origin.

I. Pump package includes: two high head pumps, two VFD, drainage valves, shut-off

valves at entering and leaving connections. The pump package is single point power

integrated into the chiller unit power with a separate factory wired control panel. The

control of the pump is integrated into the chiller controller. The controller displays both

of the evaporator pump starts and run-times. Freeze protection down to an ambient of -

20⁰F (-29⁰C) is included as standard. The cold parts of the pump package will also be

insulated. Designed with redundant pump and VFD, the chiller controls both pumps

through a lead/lag and failure/recovery functionality. A variable speed drives are

installed in an additional panel to control the pump. The VFD is adjusted upon start up

to balance the system flow and head requirements. The purpose is to save on wasted

pump energy caused by a traditional balancing valve. The drive has inputs to accept a

signal from a BAS for variable primary flow.

2.06 FANS

A. Low sound fans shall be balanced and direct driven.

B. All condenser fan TEAO motors have permanently lubricated ball bearings and

external overload protection.

C. All condenser fans shall have integrated drives to provide variable speed for optimized

efficiency and lower part load sound.

2.07 CONDENSER

A. Construct condenser coils of microchannel all aluminum brazed fin construction. The

condenser coils shall have an integral sub-cooling circuit and shall be designed for at

least 650 psig (44.8 bar) working pressure. Leak tested at 650 psig (44.8 bar). Coils

can be cleaned with high pressure water.

B. Condenser coils shall be transverse design. If coils are not transverse design, provide

coil protection for shipping.

2.08 ENCLOSURES/CHILLER CONSTRUCTION

A. Unit panels, structural elements and control boxes are constructed of galvanized steel

and mounted on a bolted galvanized steel base. Unit panels, control boxes and the

structural base are finished with a baked-on powder paint.






B. Control panel doors shall have door stays.

C. Mount starters and Terminal Blocks in a UL 1995 rated weatherproof panel provided

with full opening access doors. If a circuit breaker is chosen, it should be a lockable,

through-the-door type with an operating handle and clearly visible from outside of

chiller indicating if power is on or off.

D. The coating or paint system shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test in

accordance with ASTM B117.

2.09 CHILLER MOUNTED STARTER

A. The starter shall be across-the-line configuration, factory-mounted and fully pre-wired

to the compressor motor(s) and control panel.

B. Unit shall have a single point power connection.

C. A molded case high fault interrupting capacity circuit breaker shall be factory pre-

wired with terminal block power connections and equipped with a lockable external

operator handle, making it available to disconnect the chiller from main power.

D. A control power transformer shall be factory-installed and factory-wired to provide unit

control power.

E. Unit wiring shall run in liquid-tight conduit.

F. High short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 65kA.

2.10 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

A. All chillers shall have 2 refrigeration circuits, each with two or three (manifolded)

compressor on each circuit.

B. Provide for refrigerant circuit:

1. Liquid line shutoff valve

2. Discharge service valve

3. Filter

4. Liquid line sight glass.

5. Electronic expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure

6. Charging valve

C. Full operating charge of R410A and oil.

2.11 CONTROLS

A. A color touch sensitive liquid crystal display (LCD) shall be unit mounted and a

minimum of 7" diagonal.






B. Display shall consist of a menu driven interface with easy touch screen navigation to

organized sub-system reports for compressor and evaporator information as well as

associated diagnostics.

C. The chiller control panel shall provide password protection of all setpoints

D. The controller shall have the ability to display all primary sub-system operational

parameters on dedicated trending graphs. The operator must be able to create up to 6

additional custom trend graphs, choosing up to 10 unique parameters for each graph to

trend log data parameters simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency

polling.

E. Chilled water temperature control shall be microprocessor-based, proportional and

integral controller to show water and refrigerant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and

diagnostics. This microprocessor-based controller is to be supplied with each chiller by

the chiller manufacturer.

F. The front of the chiller control panel shall display the following in clear language,

without the use of codes, look-up tables, or gauges:

1. Run time.

2. Number of starts.

3. Current chiller operating mode.

4. Chilled water set point and set point source.

5. Demand current limit set point and set point source.

6. Entering and leaving evaporator water temperatures.

7. Saturated evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures.

8. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressure.

9. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing and over/under voltage protection.

10. Low chilled water temperature protection.

11. High and low refrigerant pressure protection.

12. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water

temperature.

13. Condenser fan sequencing to automatically cycle fans in response to load,

expansion valve pressure, condenser pressure, and differential pressure to

optimize chiller efficiency.

14. Display diagnostics.

15. Compressors: Status (on/off), anti-short cycle timer, and automatic compressor

lead-lag.

G. Weatherproof control panel shall be mounted on chiller, containing starters, power and

control wiring, factory wired with terminal block power connection. Provide primary

and secondary fused control power transformer.

H. The chiller controller shall utilize a microprocessor that will automatically take action

to prevent chiller shutdown due to abnormal operating conditions associated with

evaporator refrigerant temperature, high condensing pressure and motor current

overload.






I. Provide the following safety controls with indicating lights or diagnostic readouts:

1. Low chilled water temperature protection.

2. High refrigerant pressure.

3. Loss of chilled water flow.

4. Contact for remote emergency shutdown.

5. Motor current overload.

6. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing.

7. Over/under voltage.

8. Failure of water temperature sensor used by controller.

9. Compressor status (on or off).

J. Provide the following operating controls:

1. A variable compressor staffing method to control capacity in order to maintain

leaving chilled water temperature based on PI algorithms. Five-minute solid

state anti-recycle timer to prevent compressor from short cycling. Compressor

minimum stop-to-start time limit shall be 2 minutes. If a greater than 5-minute

start-to-start, or greater than 2-minute stop-to-start timer is included.

2. Chilled water pump output relay that closes when the chiller is given a signal to

start.

3. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water

temperature to prevent nuisance trips.

4. High ambient unloader pressure controller that unloads compressors to keep

head pressure under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance trip outs

on days when outside ambient is above design.

5. Low ambient lockout control with adjustable setpoint.

6. Condenser fan sequencing which adjusts the speed of all fans automatically in

response to ambient, condensing pressure and expansion valve pressure

differential thereby optimizing chiller efficiency.

K. Provide user interface on the front of the panel. If display is on the inside of the panel,

then a control display access door shall be provided to allow access to the display

without removal of panels. Provide user interface with a minimum of the following

features:

1. Leaving chilled water setpoint adjustment from the front panel touchscreen

display.

2. Entering and leaving chilled water temperature output

3. Pressure output of condenser

4. Pressure output of evaporator

5. Ambient temperature output

6. Demand limit setpoint adjustment from the front panel touchscreen display.

L. The chiller control panel shall provide leaving chilled water temperature reset based

upon return water temperature.

M. Digital Communications to BAS system shall consist of ability to interface with

ModBus via a single twisted pair wiring.






N. The chiller control panel shall provide input for leaving chilled water temperature

setpoint and demand limit based upon a 2-10VDC or 4-20mA signal from a building

automation system.

O. The chiller control panel shall provide an alarm relay output that shall energize

whenever a fault requiring manual reset is detected by the panel.

P. The chiller control panel shall provide an output for chiller Percent Capacity via a 2-

10VDC signal to a building automation system.

2.12 SOUND

A. Acoustics: Manufacturer must provide both sound power and sound pressure data in

decibels, per AHRI 370. A-weighted sound pressure at 30 feet should be provided at

100%, 75%, 50% and 25% load points to identify the full operational noise envelope.

B. If manufacturer cannot meet the noise levels, sound attenuation devices and/or barrier

walls must be installed to meet this performance level.

2.13 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Chiller shall have full architectural louvers panels.

B. Chiller shall ship with elastomeric Isolators

C. Chiller shall have a tarp covering full chiller

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

1. Level the chiller using the base rail as a reference. The chiller must be level

within 1/2 in over the entire length and width. Use shims as necessary to level

the chiller.

3.02 SERVICE AND START-UP

A. Startup - Provide all labor and materials to perform startup. Startup shall be performed

by a factory-trained technician from the original equipment manufacturer (OEM).

Technician shall confirm that equipment has been correctly installed and passes

specification checklist prior to equipment becoming operational and covered under

OEM warranty. This shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer's

specifications and requirements. Third-party service agencies are not permitted.

B. A start-up log shall be furnished by the factory approved start-up technician to

document the chiller's start-up date and shall be signed by the owner or his authorized

representative prior to commissioning the chillers.






C. Chiller manufacturers shall maintain service capabilities no more than X miles from the

jobsite.

D. Provide local service agent with direct access to factory support on equipment.

E. At the completion of the first season of operation, a factory-trained technician from the

original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall perform an on-site operating inspection

to confirm the chiller's operational performance. The manufacturer shall provide the

owner with a report describing the condition of the equipment, current operating log,

any issues found needing to be addressed, and recommended corrective actions.






This Page Left Blank Intentionally





REFRIGERATION SYSTEM INSULATION 131814.15 - 1

SECTION 131814.15 - REFRIGERATION SYSTEM INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe and equipment insulation.






4. Sections 131814.16 – Ice Rink Piping and Fittings

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings on all materials as required in Section 131800 - Ice Rink General.







PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries – Armaflex II, Owens-Corning, Manville,

DOW Knauf, Certainteed, or approved equal.

B. Materials:

1. Materials or accessories containing asbestos will not be accepted.






C. Use composite insulation systems (insulation, jackets, sealants, mastic, and adhesives)

that have a flame spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke developed rating of 50 or less,

with the following exceptions:

1. Outdoor mechanical insulation may have a flame spread rating of 75 and a smoke

developed rating of 150.

2. Pipe insulation that is not located in an air plenum may have a flame spread

rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 150.

3. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, softening, or

otherwise attack surfaces to which applied. Materials to be used on stainless

surfaces shall meet ASTM C795 requirements. Specification of a specific

manufacturer and products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided that

they are essentially identical in properties and performance.

D. Insulating materials shall be fire retardant, moisture and mildew resistant, and vermin

proof.

E. Insulation shall be suitable to receive jackets, adhesives, and coatings as indicated.

F. Jackets shall have puncture resistance based on ASTM D781 Test Methods.

G. Vapor barriers, where required, shall have perm ratings based on ASTM E96

Procedure A.

H. Type:

1. Type 1, Rigid Fiberglass Insulation:

a. Inside Applications: Minimum nominal density of 3 lbs. per cubic foot

and thermal conductivity of not more than 0.23 at 75º F. mean

temperature.

b. Vapor barrier cover shall be heavy-duty fire-retardant material with glass

fiber reinforcing and self-sealing lap, and white kraft finish suitable for

painting. Beach puncture resistance to be 50 units minimum. Vapor

barrier shall be .001-inch aluminum foil adhered to the inner surface of

the cover. Permeance shall not exceed 0.02 perms. Securing stapes must

be coated with vapor barrier mastic.

2. Type 2, Block Insulation:

a. Provide polystyrene, ASTM C578, suitable for temperature to 180º F.

maximum. Thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.23 at 75º F.

3. Type 3, Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Pipe Insulation:

a. Suitable for service from -40º F. to +220º F.

4. Type 4, Urethane Pipe Insulation:






a. 2 pcf density, K factor 0.13.

5. Type 5, Extruded Polystyrene:

a. 1.8 lbs/cubic feet density, Dow Styrofoam, or approved.

I. Protective Jackets:

1. Type 2, PVC Jacket:

a. ASTM C921, one-piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,

color to be as shown in schedule, or selected by Owner from

manufacturer’s standard color selections.

b. Minimum service temperature of 0º F. Maximum service temperature of

150º F.

c. Moisture vapor transmission ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inch.

d. Maximum flame spread ASTM E84; 25. Maximum smoke developed

ASTM <E84; 50.

e. Thickness of 30 mil with connections being brush-on welding adhesive.

Cover adhesive mastic shall be compatible with insulation.

2. Type 3, PVC Jacket:

a. ASTM D1784, Grade 1. High impact seamless PVC jacket, color white.

3. Aluminum Fitting Covers:

a. Fabricated from 1100 aluminum alloy, two-piece assembly.

b. 0.032-inch thickness, 2-1/2-inch size and larger.

4. Aluminum Jacket:

a. Type T-3003 H-14 sheet.

b. 0.016-inch minimum thickness, smooth or embossed pattern.

c. Secured with ½-inch wide 0.020-inch thick type 304 stainless steel

bands.

5. Aluminum Fitting Covers:

a. Type 304 sheet with smooth finish.

b. 0.010-inch thickness.

c. Secured with ½-inch wide 0.020-inch thick type 304 stainless steel

bands.

J. Accessories:






1. All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are

applied and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which

they are applied.

2. Adhesives, sealants, mastic, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by

insulation manufacturer for applications specified and be compatible with

insulation and jacket materials.

3. Insulation bands to be 3/4-inch-wide, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel.

Minimum thickness to be .015 inch for aluminum and .010 inch for stainless

steel.

4. Insulating cement to be ANSI/ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool.

5. Finishing cement to be ASTM C449.

6. Bedding compounds to be non-shrinking and permanently flexible.

7. Vapor barrier coatings to be non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin.

8. Wire mesh reinforcing shall be corrosion resistant metal with a hexagonal

pattern.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of five days in advance of placing

insulation so that necessary inspections can be performed.

B. Do not insulate systems or equipment, which are specified to be pressure tested or

inspected, until testing and inspection have been successfully completed.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Insulation, jackets or accessories shall only be installed under ambient temperatures or

conditions recommended by the manufacturer of the material.

B. Insulation and jackets shall be provided as indicated in Schedules 3.03.I and 3.04.F.

Schedules apply to both exposed and concealed applications, unless noted otherwise.

C. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces, and on clean and dry surfaces. Poorly

fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled

terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation

terminates.

D. Use full-length material (as delivered from manufacturer) wherever possible. Scrap

piecing of insulation will not be accepted.

E. Provide removable insulation sections to permit easy access where inspection service or

repairs are required.

F. Install jackets with longitudinal joints facing wall or ceiling.






G. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and openings, except where partitions or

assemblies are fire rated. Penetrations through rated assemblies shall be sealed with

fireproofing insulation.

H. Provide a complete vapor barrier for insulation on the following systems:

1. Cold water.

2. Cold brine.

3. Cold R-410A refrigerant.

4. Equipment and heat exchangers with an operating surface temperature below

65°F.

I. Aluminum and Stainless Steel jacket:

1. Provide minimum 2-inch lap at longitudinal and tangential seams.

2. Secure jacket with two metal bands per section.

3. For systems requiring a vapor barrier, seal joints with vapor barrier mastic.

3.3 PIPING, VALVES, AND FITTING INSULATION

A. Fittings and valves may be insulated with factory molded or built up insulation. Built up

insulation must have the same thickness as adjoining insulation.

B. One-piece, insulated PVC covers may be used for fittings and valves if insulation

thickness and thermal performance is the same as adjoining insulation. Seams, joints

between PVC cover and adjoining pipe insulation, and any staples or tacks used to secure

seams in PVC covers, must be covered with 2-inch wide, 10 mil PVC tape.

C. Provide inserts of high-density block insulation at hanger or support locations. Insert

must be installed under the finish jacket on piping 2 inches and larger to prevent

insulation from sagging or compressing at support points. Inserts shall be heavy density

insulating material suitable for the operating temperature range of the system being

insulated. Wood blocks will not be accepted. Insulation inserts shall not be less than the

following lengths:

Pipe Size Length Through 2-1/2 Inch 10 Inches 3 Inch to 6 Inch 12 Inches 8 Inch to 10 Inch 16 Inches 12 Inches and larger 22 Inches

D. Insulation shall be applied to piping with butt joints and longitudinal seams closed

tightly.

E. Minimum acceptable lap on factory applied jackets shall be 2 inches, firmly cemented

with lap adhesive.






F. All seams and butt joints must be sealed with an adhesive recommended by the insulation

manufacturer. Vapor barrier mastic is required at all seams for R-410A piping.

G. Type 2 and Type 3 insulation shall be applied to piping with bonding adhesive and

staggered joints. Fill all joints and seams with vapor barrier sealant.

H. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers,

flexible connections, and expansion joints. Insulation for valves, unions, strainers,

flexible connections, and expansion joints shall be removable for inspection and repair.

I. Provide and install pipe insulation as indicated in the following schedule:

Equipment Insulation Thickness Jacket

Exposed Cold Brine Type 5 2” Type 2

Primary Refrigeration

Suction and cold liquid Type 5 See below * Type 2

Buried Cold Brine Piping and

Snow Melt Piping Type 5 3” Type 3

Exposed Snow Melt Heat

Piping Type 3 1” None

Water Piping To and From

Condenser Type 3 1” None

*Pipe size 1/2" – 1-1/4" 1-1/2" – 8”

Insulation Thickness 1-1/2 inches 2 inches 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Where equipment is specified to be leak tested prior to operation, do not install insulation

until testing and any necessary repairs have been successfully completed.

B. Insulation shall be applied to equipment shells with bonding adhesive and staggered joints.

Fill all joints and seams with vapor barrier sealant.

C. Insulation shall be covered with a vapor barrier coating.

D. Provide insulated boxes with protective jacket where access is required for cleaning, repair,

or inspection. Boxes must be easily removable without causing damage to insulation or

equipment.

E. Do not insulate equipment that is factory insulated.

F. Provide and install equipment insulation as follows:

Equipment Insulation Thickness Jacket

Brine pumps Type 3 2 Inches None

Heat exchangers Type 3 1 Inch None

Chiller and surge drum Type 3 2 Inches None





ICE RINK PIPING SPECIALTIES 131814.16 - 1

SECTION 131814.16 - ICE RINK PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Expansion tanks, pressure gauges, thermometers, and other piping specialties for ice

system.




2. Section 131800 – Ice Rink General.

3. Sections 131814.01 – Ice Rink Refrigeration General


5. Section 131814.17 – Ice Rink Piping and Fittings

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shall be as required in Section 131800 – Ice Rink General.





PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Approved Manufacturers: ITT Bell & Gossett, John Wood Company, Wessel Company, or

approved equal.

B. Capacity and Size: As shown on the drawing schedules.

C. Tanks must be designed, constructed, and stamped for 125 psig @ 650° F. in accordance

with Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and registered

with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.






D. Tanks shall have two (2) 1/2-inch NPT gauge glass tappings in one head and a minimum of

two (2) 1-inch NPT tappings in the shell.

E. Gauge glass shall be Henry Valve Company Type 824 or approved equal.

F. Air Control Tank Fitting:

1. Shall be ITT Bell & Gossett Tank Fitting ATFL or approved equal.

2. Cast iron body, copper tubes, brass vent tube plug, and stainless-steel ball check.

G. Tanks shall be painted with one shop coat of air-dry enamel.

2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Approved Manufacturers: United Instruments, McDaniel, Ashcroft, Marshalltown, or

approved equal.

B. Design Conditions:

1. All gauges shall be scaled from 0 to 100 psi unless otherwise noted.

C. Shall be minimum 4-1/2-inch diameter, bronze bourdon tube type, glycerin filled, 1 percent

full-scale accuracy gauges with 1/2-inch stainless steel socket.

D. Case shall be stainless steel.

E. Lens shall be laminated safety glass and movement and bourdon tube shall be stainless

steel.

F. Provide snubber and brass shut off Apollo ball valve with lever handle. Provide pipe

nipples for handle clearance.

2.3 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Approved Manufacturers: ITT Bell & Gossett No. 87, or approved equal.

B. Shall have combination 1/2-inch FPT and ¾- inch MPT connection and Apollo ball valve.

2.4 HANGERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Grinnell Figures 108, 171, 174, 260 or equivalent by Crane, or

approved equal.

B. Brackets: Grinnell Figures 194, 195, 199 or equivalent by Crane, or equal.

C. Clevis type sized to fit neatly over insulation; provide 12-gauge pipe saddles and inserts of

high-density block insulation at all hangers for insulated pipe as specified in Section 13180

– Refrigeration System Insulation.






2.5 THERMOMETERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Trerice CX Series, Weksler, or approved equal.

B. Case and stem shall be adjustable.

C. Accuracy shall be ± one scale division.

D. Case: Bronze finish molded plastic case.

E. Non-breakable plastic front.

F. Scale: -40° F. to 110° F.

G. Scale Size: 9 inch.

2.7 TEMPERATURE WELLS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Hoffman Specialty Series 1140 or approved equal.

B. Bulb: Copper.

2.8 THERMOCOUPLES

A. Suitable for use with temperature wells.

2.9 FLOW SWITCH

A. Approved Manufacturers: McDonnell & Miller or approved equal.

B. Brass Construction.

C. NEMA 4X enclosure.

D. Adjustable for flow sensitivity.

E. Maximum Pressure: 150 psi.

F. Maximum Temperature: 225° F.

2.10 SUCTION DIFFUSER/STRAINERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: ITT Bell & Gossett, Taco, or approved equal.

B. Body: Flanged, cast iron.

C. Straightening Veins: Steel or cast iron.






D. Orifice: Steel.

E. Strainer: 3/16-inch diameter openings, stainless steel.

F. O-Ring Seal: EPDM.

G. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi.

H. Adjustable pipe support.

I. Start-Up Strainer: 16 mesh bronze.

J. Provide removable magnetic inserts.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All piping specialties shall be installed as shown on the Drawings, as described herein, and

in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

B. Expansion tanks shall be hung from ceiling or wall brackets, with adequate supports and

with gauge glass easily visible.

C. Air vents shall be placed at all high points in the system where air may collect and not be

carried by the system.

D. Start-up strainers in the suction diffusers shall be removed after system start-up.

E. Pipe supports shall be spaced no more than 8 feet on center. Provide additional supports

near equipment to support piping.

F. All piping shall be supported in such a way to eliminate swaying and vibration

transmission.






ICE RINK PIPING AND FITTINGS 131814.17 - 1

SECTION 131814.17 - ICE RINK PIPING AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping and fittings for refrigeration system.



1. Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 – General Requirements.


3. Sections 131813.02 – Ice Rink Floor – Portable Surface


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit results of all pressure tests.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYETHYLENE PIPE

A. As specified in Section 131813.02 – Ice Rink Floor – Portable Surface

2.2 COPPER PIPE

A. Seamless tubing.

B. All brazed fittings and connections.

C. Copper pipe shall conform with ASTM, Type L.






2.3 STEEL PIPE

A. Material:

1. Piping 1-1/2-inch diameter and smaller shall be Schedule 80 carbon steel with

welded joints.

2. Piping larger than 1-1/2-inch diameter shall be Schedule 40 carbon steel with

welded joints.

B. Joints:

1. Weld end type.

2. No threaded joints allowed.

C. Fittings:

1. ANSI 11.9 carbon steel welding type.

2. Manufactured not field/shop fabricated.

D. Welds:

1. All welds shall be full penetration type welds.

2.4 PVC PIPE

A. PVC Piping shall be Schedule 40.

B. Solvent welded, threaded, or flanged fittings and connections.

2.5 PIPE HANGERS

A. See Section 131814.16 – Ice Rink Piping Specialties.

2.6 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. All piping shall be color-coded as required in Section 131814.15 – Refrigeration System

Insulation.

B. All exposed interior and exterior piping shall receive pipe markers as specified below.

C. Pipe Markers:

1. Shall identify the exact name of the conveyed fluid and direction of flow.

2. Shall be provided for all ice system piping included in this project. All sections of

these Contract Documents are included.

3. Shall be rolled, plastic-coated type markers.

4. Markers shall snap around entire circumference of pipe.

5. Markers shall be removable.






6. Markers requiring bonding, taping, adhesives or other fastening devices shall not be

allowed.

7. Markers shall conform to ANSI and OSHA requirements for marker size, marker

color, legend size, and legend color.

8. Placement:

a. Interior and exterior.

b. Each pipe shall be labeled with a minimum of two markers in each room.

c. Markers shall be installed on all branch lines of all header pipes.

d. Markers shall be installed on all header lines between branches.

e. Where the same pipe goes through a wall or piece of equipment, markers on

each side of wall are required.

f. Markers for chemical piping shall in no case exceed a 10-foot spacing.

g. In no case, on all other piping, shall markers exceed a 20-foot spacing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. All brine piping in the Equipment Room shall be steel pipe. All R-410A piping and vent

piping in the Equipment Room shall be steel pipe.

B. Seal all pipe penetrations through the walls, ceilings or floors, with fire-rated sealant.

C. Provide drain lines and valves in locations necessary for complete drainage of the system,

including all low points in the piping system and equipment.

D. Install pipe supports as specified in Section 131814.16 – Ice Rink Piping Specialties.

E. All piping shall be supported in such a way to eliminate swaying and vibration transmission.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BURIED PIPE

A. Inspection:

1. Before placing the pipe in the trench, the pipe and fittings shall be inspected for

defects. Any defective, damaged, or unsound material shall be rejected.

Polyethylene pipe damaged such that approximately 10 percent or more of the wall

thickness is reduced shall be replaced.

2. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and fittings

before it is lowered into its position in the trench and shall be kept clean by

approved means during and after laying. All openings along the line of the main

shall be securely closed as directed, and in the suspension of work at any time,

suitable stoppers shall be placed to prevent earth or other substances from entering

the main.

3. No pipe shall be laid in water or when the trench conditions are unsuitable for such

work, except by written permission of the Engineer.






3.3 BACKFILLING

A. All excavation in trenches shall be backfilled to the original ground surface or to such grades

as specified in the Contract Documents. The backfilling shall begin as soon as practical after

the pipe has been placed. Prior to any backfilling, the excavation shall be cleaned of all

trash, debris, organic material, and other undesirable material.

B. Backfilling and compacting shall be done as thoroughly as possible so as to prevent after

settlement. Depositing of the backfill shall be done so the shock of falling material will not

injure the pipe or structures.

C. Granular material or other suitable material as determined by the Engineer, free from rocks

and boulders, shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the

full width of the trench to a height at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe, shovel placed,

and hand tamped to fill completely all spaces under and adjacent to the pipe.

D. Backfill material shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of the standard moisture density

relationship of soils (ASTM D698). Under building or structures the backfill material shall

be compacted to 98 percent of the standard moisture density relationship of soils (ASTM

D698).

E. In the event that natural, suitable, granular material is not encountered during the normal

excavation of the trench or when the material encountered is determined unsuitable by the

Engineer for backfilling around the pipe as required, the Contractor shall provide and place

such approved material.

F. Trench shall be backfilled with suitable material to obtain necessary compaction with lift

thickness as required, dependent on the type of roller used, but not to exceed two feet.

G. Any settlements greater than 1 inch as measured with a string line from one edge of the

settlement to the other within the warranty period of this Contract shall be considered failure

of the mechanical compaction and all overlying concrete floors shall be repaired by the

Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

3.4 BRINE PIPING PRESSURE TESTS

A. The Engineer shall witness the testing. Provide five days notice to allow the Engineer to be

on the Project Site.

B. Buried brine piping, headers, transmission mains, and rink floor piping and tubing shall be

tested as described in Section 131813.02– Ice Rink Floor – Portable Surface.

C. Above ground brine piping shall be tested as specified in this Section.

D. Pipe Testing Procedure:

1. Fill the piping system with fluid and bleed off any trapped air.






2. Testing:

a. Apply a pressure of 75 psig for a period of 24 hours.

b. After the 24 hours test has passed, increase the pressure to 100 psig for 10

minutes.

3. Protect all equipment during testing that is not rated for the specified pressure.

3.5 R-410-A REFRIGERANT PIPE PRESSURE TEST

A. At the completion of the R-410A refrigerant pipe installation, the entire R-410A system shall

be tested.

B. The Engineer shall witness the testing. Provide five days notice to allow the Engineer to be

on the Project Site.

C. The piping system shall be tested with nitrogen at 300 psig for a period of 24 hours.

3.6 PRIMARY REFRIGERANT CHARGING

A. After the rink piping pressure test has passed and material has been placed over the pipe, a

vacuum pump shall be connected to the piping system and operated until all air and moisture

have been removed to a vacuum reading of 500 microns or lower. The measurement shall be

made after the pump has been shut off for a minimum of 10 minutes.

B. After the piping system has been evacuated, the system shall be filled with R-410A

refrigerant, as specified in Section 131814.01 – Ice Rink Refrigeration General, to the

optimum operating level.

3.7 INSULATION

A. Pipes and fittings shall be insulated as specified in Section 131814.15 – Refrigeration System

Insulation.

3.8 PAINTING

A. All interior and exterior steel piping, hangers, supports, and accessories that are not specified

to be insulated shall be field painted:

1. Surface Preparation: ST6 Blast.

2. Primer Coat:

a. 90G97 by Tnemec Company, Inc., or approved equal.

b. Thickness: One coat 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 mils.

c. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Intermediate Coat:






a. Series 161 by Tnemec Company, Inc., or approved equal.

b. Thickness: One coat 3 to 5 mils.

c. Color: As specified by the Engineer selected from the Manufacturer’s

standard colors.

4. Finish Coat:

a. Interior: Series 66 by Tnemec Company, Inc., or approved equal.

b. Exterior: Series 74 by Tnemec Company, Inc., or approved equal.

c. Thickness: One coat 3 to 5 mils.

d. Colors: As specified by the Engineer selected from Manufacturer’s

standard colors. More than one color may be selected.






ICE RINK VALVES 131814.18 - 1

SECTION 131814.18 - ICE RINK VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Valves and accessories for ice system.



1. Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 – General Requirements.



4. Section 131814.17 – Ice Rink Piping and Fittings

1.3 SUBMITTALS






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES

A. Approved Manufacturers: ITT Bell & Gossett or approved equal.

B. Operates as non-slam check valve, shutoff valve, and throttling valve.

C. Cast iron or flanged body, brass seat, and bronze disc with EPDM seat insert.

D. Stainless steel stem and spring, and Teflon-graphite packing.

E. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psi.

2.2 NON-SLAM CHECK VALVES






A. Approved Manufacturers: Nibco, Stockham, or approved equal.

B. Cast iron flanged body, bonnet, disc plate, and disc cage, ASTM A126, Class B.

C. Cast bronze disc, seat ring, and hanger, ASTM B585, Alloy C84400.

D. Brass side plug, hanger pin, disc nut, disc bolt, ASTM B16, Alloy C36000.

E. Renewable Seat and Disc.

F. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psi.

2.3 BALL VALVES

A. Approved Manufacturers: Apollo 70 Series or approved equal.

B. Bronze body, 316 stainless steel ball, and Teflon seats.

C. Provide stem extensions on insulated piping.

2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Approved Manufacturers: Stockham LG-512 wafer type, Pratt, Henry, or equal.

B. Cast iron body and stainless steel shaft.

C. Teflon, nylatron, or acetal bearings.

D. EPDM resilent seat.

E. Provide valve neck extension if needed for valves installed in insulated pipe.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. All valves to be tagged with non-ferrous metal or plastic tags fastened to valve stems.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer the designation to be used for each valve.

2.6 THREE WAY CONTROL VALVES

A. Approved Manufacturers: Trerice or approved equal.

B. Cast iron body, bronze trim.

C. 125PSI pressure rating, 300F temperature rating.

D. Cl 125 flanged connections.






E. Trerice 91400 Series temperature regulator, with 3.5” temperature indicating dial. Fully self

contained, no external power required. Aluminum housing, brass bellows.

F. Manufacturer’s recommended capillary tube and sensing bulb.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All valves and accessories shall be installed as shown on the Drawings, as described herein,

and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

B. Install solenoid valves with sufficient room above valve to remove coil.

C. Provide drain lines and valves in locations necessary for complete drainage of ice system,

including all low points in piping system and equipment.

D. Pipe all air release valves and pressure relief valve discharge ports to floor using appropriate

diameter copper tubing. Fasten tubing to wall.

E. Contractor shall provide power and wiring to all electrically serviced equipment specified

herein.






ICE SYSTEM – BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 131815.01 - 1

SECTION 131815.01 - ICE SYSTEM – BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. References used in Division 13 – Ice System Electrical Specification Sections.

B. Scope of work.

C. Regulatory requirements for electrical construction.

D. Requirements of equipment and materials.

E. Workmanship.


A. Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 – General Requirements Sections.

B. Division 13 – Special Construction Specification Sections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute:

1. C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

2. C62.41 - Guide to Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

C. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers:

1. 112 - Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

D. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association:

1. NECA - Standards of Installation.

E. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. TC2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).

2. MG-1 – Motors and Generators.

3. ICS2 – Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

4. 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum).






5. WC5 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and

Distribution of Electrical Energy.

6. WC7 – Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Agency:

1. NFPA70 - National Electrical Code.

G. REA – Rural Electrification Administration.

H. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

I. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:

1. UL-6 – Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit.

2. UL-83 – Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires and Cables.

3. UL-360 – Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.

4. UL-508 – Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.

5. UL-810 – Capacitors.

6. UL-1479 – Fire Tests of Through – Penetration Firestops.

1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall provide all wiring, conduit, panels, controls, etc. for a complete

operational electrical system as required by these Specifications. A locally licensed Master

Electrician shall be retained to design, lay out, and install all electrical work on this Project.

Specification Sections 131815.01 through 131815.08, drawing notes, electrical one-line

diagram, and details are intended to provide minimum standards for the electrical installation

and are not intended to represent a final designed electrical system.

B. Contractor shall provide 110-volt power as needed for control systems, the refrigerant leak

detector, compressor heaters, the telephone dialer, and any other equipment or device that

requires 110-volt power. 110-volt power shall be obtained from the nearest available 110-

volt power panel. All necessary conduit, wiring, and devices shall be provided.


A. All work performed under this Contract shall conform to the latest editions of all locally

applicable Electrical Codes, the National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C2), and any

applicable District of Columbia Building Code.

B. Refrigeration system controls and wiring shall meet the requirements of the International

Mechanical and Electrical Codes.

1.6 INSTRUCTIONS AND PARTS LITERATURE






A. Instruction and parts literature is generally packed with electrical equipment and devices.

Contractor shall remove this literature from the packing container or equipment enclosure,

identify the literature with the equipment to which it applies, and file the literature in loose-

leaf binders with index tabs. Each binder shall have an index which lists each piece of

equipment and the literature which applies to it. An index tab shall be provided for each

piece of equipment.

B. There are a number of devices, such as solenoid valves, pressure switches, etc., which are

removed from their packaging and installed by other trades. Contractor shall establish a

procedure with the other trades for receiving, identifying, and filing this literature as outlined

above.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted with Contractor’s stamp of approval and as required in

Section 131800 – Ice Rink General.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

label if such products are listed by UL.

B. Where applicable equipment and materials shall conform to ANSI, ICEA, IEEE, and NEMA

Standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner consistent with the high-quality

standards of the electrical trade. Electricians shall be knowledgeable and well-trained in the

particular tasks to be performed.

3.2 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Equipment that is not free-standing shall not be mounted on wood panels, but shall be

attached to concrete or masonry walls, support channels, or building structural steel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Laminated plastic nameplates or engraved brass tags shall be used to identify all field

devices, such as disconnect switches, local pushbutton stations, pressure switches,

transmitters, etc.






3.4 RECEIVING AND STORING EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.

B. In general, equipment packaging is not designed to protect the contents for outdoor storage.

As a minimum, Contractor shall store the equipment prior to installation in a clean, dry

location free from excessive temperatures, humidity, or foreign materials normally

encountered at a Project Site. If the storage facility is unheated, Contractor shall provide

heating to protect control equipment from condensation which could cause electronic

components to corrode or to be otherwise damaged.






ICE SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 131815.02 - 1

SECTION 131815.02 - ICE SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Conduit.

B. Conduit fittings.

C. Underground warning tape.

D. Pull and junction boxes.

E. Fire stop material.


A. Conditions of the Contract, Special Conditions, and Division 01 – General Requirements

Sections.


C. Section 131815.01 – Ice System - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation.

B. NEMA TC2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).

C. NEMA 250-1985 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum).

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. UL-360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.

F. UL-651 - Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit.

G. UL-797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing.

H. UL-1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.






1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data sheets for each type of conduit shall be submitted in accordance with the

requirements of Section 131800 – Ice Rink General.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. EPC-40-PVC and EPC-80-PVC for Type II and Type III applications.

B. Sunlight resistant.

C. Approved for:

1. Direct burial.

2. Concrete encasement.

3. Above ground and exposed applications.

D. NEMA TC2.

E. NFPA 70 Article 347.

F. UL-651.

G. UL listed.

H. Carlon, CertainTeed, or approved equal.

2.2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Galvanized exterior.

B. Corrosion resistant, lubricating interior coating.

C. Galvanized or zinc plated finish steel fittings:

1. Set screw, concrete-tight type, except raintight/concrete-tight gland compression

type in wet locations.

2. Insulated throat connectors.

3. UL listed.

4. Appleton, Midwest Electric, O-Z/Gedney, or approved equal.


E. UL-797.






F. UL listed.

2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Galvanized steel core.

B. Built-in continuous copper ground in 1/2 inch through 1-1/4 inch.

C. PVC jacket.


E. UL-360.

F. UL listed.

G. Amer-Tite Type UL, Anamet Anaconda Sealtite Type UA, Electri-Flex Liquatite Type LA,

or approved equal.

H. Connectors:


2. UL listed.

3. Appleton STB, Crouse-Hinds LTB, Midwest Electric LTB, or approved equal.

2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Six inches wide, 4 mil polyethylene film.

B. Vivid, opaque, long-lasting red color with bold, black letters.

C. Lettering:

1. Top line - “...CAUTION...CAUTION...CAUTION...”

2. Bottom line - “...ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW...”

D. Seton Name Plate Corp. No. 210 ELE, EMED Co. Stock No. UT27737-6, or approved equal.

2.5 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Fabricated from galvanized steel.

B. Covers attached with stainless steel screws located within 1/2 inch of each corner and spaced

not more than 12 inches apart.

C. Neoprene gasketed covers.






D. Sized per NFPA 70 with enough capacity to add to each side at least 2 conduits of the same

size as the largest conduit that enters the box.

E. Weatherproof die-cast aluminum boxes with threaded outlets for all surface mounted outlets;

Bell (Raco) or approved equal.

F. Galvanized fittings and boxes for EMT conduit.

2.6 FIRE RETARDANT MATERIAL

A. Fire stop foam.

B. Fire stop sealant.

C. Fire Rating: 3 hours.

D. UL classified per UL 1479.

E. Chase Technology Corp., Dow Corning, General Electric, 3M, or approved equal.

2.7 DUCT SEALING COMPOUND

A. Soft, fibrous, slightly tacky, non-hardening, and easily applied by hand at all working

temperatures.

B. Clean and non-staining.

C. J.M. Clipper Corp. Duxseal, O-Z/Gedney DUX, or approved equal.

2.8 CABLE FITTINGS

A. Aluminum or stainless steel threaded body and gland nut.

B. Neoprene bushing.

C. Stainless steel wire mesh grip.

D. Crouse-Hinds CGB with RPE wire mesh grip, Killems CG, or approved equal.

2.9 WIREWAYS

A. NEMA 12, minimum 14-gauge steel, ANSI 61 gray enamel finish inside and out over

phosphatized surfaces.

B. Fourteen-gauge stainless steel for corrosive environments.

C. Smooth, rounded edges on all sections and fittings.






D. Hinge type with screw clamps which are galvanized or stainless steel.

E. UL listed (UL 870).

F. Sized per NFPA 70, Article 362.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Conduit size shall be as required by the NFPA 70 with a minimum size of 3/4 inch, except

that 1/2 inch may be used to connect to devices that have a knock-out or fitting for only 1/2-

inch conduit. All raceways shall be installed in accordance with NECA Standard of

Installation and as specified herein.

B. Pull boxes or fittings shall be installed as project site and pulling requirements dictate.

C. All exposed raceways shall be EMT, except where noted otherwise.

D. Raceways installed under floor slabs shall be rigid nonmetallic.

E. Conduits or groups of conduits shall run parallel to or perpendicular to building lines.

Grouped conduits shall be supported at proper intervals with trapeze or bracket type hangers

constructed of galvanized Unistrut, Power-Strut, or approved equal. All hangers, fasteners,

nuts, etc. shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel. Support fasteners shall be preset inserts,

beam clamps, expansion shields, or gun-driven studs.

F. Any conduit run which goes through an exterior building wall or between rooms of more

than 30 F. difference in temperature shall be sealed internally at the wall with duct sealing

compound.

G. All pull and outlet boxes shall be set plumb. Boxes for concealed wiring shall be flush with

the finished surface. All boxes shall be UL listed for the location in which they are installed.

H. Expansion fittings shall be installed at building expansion joints and where the length of

straight run requires it.

I. All conduits shall be kept dry and free of water or debris with pipe plugs or caps.

J. Conduit and boxes shall not be attached to or suspended from equipment or mechanical

ductwork. Where box or conduit must be mounted below ductwork, provide a structural

channel support which is suspended from the ceiling or bracketed from a wall. Attachments

to equipment shall be directly to the electrical devices associated with it.

K. Conduit terminations to terminal boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall have double locknuts

and insulated bushings. External locknuts shall be sealing locknuts.






L. All conduits which enter major equipment, such as the motor control center, shall have

grounding type, insulating bushings.

M. Conduit terminations to outdoor NEMA 3R, 4, and 4X terminal boxes, pull boxes, cabinets,

and enclosures shall use full contact hubs.

N. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used to connect from the rigid conduit system to

equipment and devices if a rigid connection for motor connections is improper or

impractical.

O. Underground conduit runs shall have a minimum cover of 2 feet and shall be rigid

nonmetallic conduit, unless noted otherwise. All metal conduit installed underground or in

contact with concrete shall be painted with 1 coat of Koppers 40 PASIVATOR, or approved

equal, as a pre-treatment followed by 2 coats of Koppers “Coal Tar Epoxy 300M,” or

approved equal. Schedule 80 non-metallic conduit shall be used for the vertical elbow and

riser out of the ground.

P. Contractor shall do all trenching for underground conduit with a minimum size trench.

Underground warning tape shall be laid approximately 9 inches below the surface in the

trench above the conduit.

Q. Provide cable fittings and wire mesh grip for cable entry into conduit.

3.2 OPENINGS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all openings required for installation.

B. All openings shall be filled with an approved sealant, caulking, or grout after the conduit or

cable installation is complete.






ICE SYSTEM - WIRES AND CABLES 131815.03 - 1

SECTION 131815.03 - ICE SYSTEM - WIRES AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Wire and Cable: 600 volt.

B. Multi-conductor instrument cable.

C. Terminals and connectors.

D. Installation.

E. Splices and terminations.

F. Identification.




C. Section 131815.01 – Ice System – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum).

B. NEMA WC5 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and

Distribution of Electrical Energy.

C. NEMA WC7 - Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. UL 83 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires and Cables.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data sheets shall be submitted for all wire and cable in accordance with the

requirements of Section 131800 – Ice Rink General.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE

A. Feeder and Branch Circuit Wire:

1. Stranded copper conductor.

2. THWN insulated for conductor sizes #4 AWG and smaller.

3. XHHW or THWN insulation for conductor Sizes #3 AWG and larger.

B. Control Wire:

1. #14 AWG, 7 or 9 strand copper.

2. THWN or XHHW insulation.

3. Solid color.

C. Insulation of all wire shall conform to NEMA-WC5, NEMA-WC7, NFPA 70, and UL-83.

D. All Wire and Cable Shall Be:

1. New and coiled or on reels.

2. Each coil and/or reel shall have a label with the manufacturer's name, trade name of

wire, size of wire, and UL label.

2.2 MULTI-CONDUCTOR INSTRUMENT CABLE

A. 2 conductor, 3 conductor, or 4 conductor #16 shielded.

B. Stranded tinned copper conductors.

C. Polyethylene color-coded insulation.

D. Aluminum foil shield and drain wire.

E. Overall PVC or neoprene jacket which is resistant to oil, ozone, moisture, and sunlight.

F. Carol Cable Co. C1600 Series or approved equal.

G. Special instrument and signal cable shall be provided with the equipment that requires them.






2.3 TERMINALS AND CONNECTORS

A. Tool compressed terminals and connectors shall be Burndy, Thomas and Betts, or approved

equal.

B. Fork Terminals:

1. Vinyl or nylon self-insulated locking type.

2. Terminal insulation supports wire insulation.

3. Thomas & Betts Type FL, Burndy Type TP-LF, Panduit Type PNF, 3M Type MNG,

or approved equal.

C. Waterproof wrap-around sleeves shall be utilized for all outdoor below-grade splices and

connections; Raychem Type CRSM, 3M 82-BF1, or approved equal.

2.4 WIRE COLOR CODING

A. Color code all wiring according to the following table. Use solid colors through size No. 8

AWG. Use black conductors with tape color identification No. 6 AWG and larger:

Voltage 208Y/120 480Y/277

Phase A Black Brown

Phase B Red Orange

Phase C Blue Yellow

Neutral White Gray

Ground Green Green

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All wire shall be installed in the specified raceways. Wire pulling shall be performed

through the system in such a manner as to not exceed the maximum tensile strength of the

cable being pulled as allowed by the NFPA 70 and/or cable manufacturer. All handling and

installation of wire and cables shall be done by competent and skilled workmen who shall

use methods which will prevent damage to the wire and cable. Pulling compound shall dry to

a fine lubricating non-conductive powder and shall be approved by the cable manufacturer.

B. Adequate measures shall be employed to determine that the raceways are free of foreign

material and moisture before pulling wire or cable.

C. Any conductor used for equipment grounding purposes shall be green in color, unless it is

bare. Conductors with white or green covering shall not be used to indicate other than

neutral or grounding. This limitation applies to all power and control circuits. Equipment

grounding conductors shall be installed with each feeder circuit and with each motor circuit.






D. Conductors shall be without splice from termination to termination.

E. Conductors for ac and dc circuits shall be installed in separate conduits.

F. A minimum of 10 percent, but not less than 4 spare conductors shall be provided in control

circuit runs between control panels and from the motor control centers to control panels.

G. All 4-20mA signal circuits shall be 2/c #16 shielded.


A. All splices, taps, and terminations shall be made with tool compressed connectors.

Contractor shall provide all wire connectors, lugs, and terminals, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Bolted compression lugs furnished as an integral part of the equipment shall be used to

terminate the conductors to that equipment.

C. Motor leads shall be connected with tool-compressed ring terminals which are bolted

together, insulated with varnished cambric tape, and protected with an over-wrap of 3M No.

33, or approved equal weather resistant tape, or protected with Raychem MCK motor

connection kit.

D. All control wiring shall be terminated to terminal strips at both ends with fork terminals.

Spare wires in control panels shall be terminated to spare terminals. Spare wires in motor

control centers shall be coiled by respective conduit, labeled, and shall be long enough to

reach cubicle furthest from conduit.

E. Every bolt, lug, and screw termination shall be tightened with a torque wrench or torque

screwdriver to the torqued values specified in UL Standards and/or as specified by the device

manufacturer.

F. Terminal cabinets installed indoors shall have NEMA 12 enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Control circuits may be color-coded using available colors; however, they shall be identified

at each terminal with an imprinted sleeve; Brady Type HSA Heat Shrinkable, 3M “Scotch

Code,” Raychem TMS, Thomas & Betts HVM, or approved equal. The imprinted sleeve

shall be protected with a clear, heat-shrinkable, non-burning sleeve; Brady Type HSB,

Sinclair and Rush Shrink-Loc GPF-135, Raychem TMS, or approved equal. Each control

circuit shall be identified at both ends with the same number; wire number shall be the same

as the wire number shown on the Equipment Drawings. Spare conductors shall be identified

with a single letter at both ends.

B. Control circuits shall be tagged as a group where they enter a piece of equipment, a pull box,

or a terminal cabinet. Tag shall identify the location of the other end of the run, shall show

the conduit size, shall show the quantity and size of conductors, and shall list all the wire

numbers. Tags shall be 3/4-inch x 3-1/2-inch nylon plates, Panduit Part No. MP350, or






approved equal, marked in black with a marking pen specifically designed for such use;

Panduit Part No. PX-O, or approved equal. If more space is required than available on the

above nylon plates, tags shall be approximately 2-3/8 inches x 4-3/4 inches medium weight

shipping tags with reinforced eyelet, Dennison Size 5, Grade G, or approved equal. Tags

shall be marked with black ink and the writing shall be covered with adhesive-backed plastic

or clear polyester film tape, such as 3M Scotch Brand 3750 clear box sealing tape or

approved equal.






ICE SYSTEM - MOTORS 131815.04 - 1

SECTION 131815.04 - ICE SYSTEM - MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fractional horsepower motors.

B. Integral horsepower motors.



B. Section 131815.01 – Ice System – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

C. Section 131815.08 – Ice System - Electrical Testing.

D. Division 13 – Special Construction Specification Sections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. IEEE Standard 112 - Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and

Generators (Method B).

B. NEMA MG - Motors and Generators.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Certified outline dimension prints and data sheets which include nameplate information; 1/2,

3/4, and 4/4 load efficiency; 1/2, 3/4, and 4/4 load power factor; and maximum kVAR rating

shall be submitted for each motor.

B. Contractor shall provide all data necessary for the Engineer to prepare any rebate forms.

C. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 131800 – Ice Rink

General.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS






A. Motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower shall be 115-volt, single phase, 60 Hz or 208-volt, 3

phase, 60 Hz as specified in the driven equipment section. If not specified otherwise,

enclosure shall be open dripproof with cast iron or steel housing. Stator windings shall be

copper. Motors shall have a 1.15 service factor, adequate torque to accelerate the load, a

horsepower rating which will drive the load continuously at all operating conditions without

exceeding the nameplate rating and bracing for full voltage starting. Special torque motors

shall be provided as determined by the driven equipment.

B. Motors shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with ANSI/NEMA

Publication No. MG 1.

2.2 INTEGRAL HORSPOWER MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be 460-volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz, squirrel cage induction

motors. NEMA design shall be determined by the torque requirements of the driven load.

Motors shall have a 1.15 service factor, adequate torque to accelerate the load continuously

at all operating conditions without exceeding the nameplate rating, not including the service

factor, and shall be braced for full voltage starting. Special torque motors shall be provided

as determined by the driven equipment. Inrush current shall not exceed NFPA 70, Code G.

B. Special features, such as wye-delta, part-winding start, and inverter duty rating shall be

provided as required by the driven equipment application.

C. Motors shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with ANSI/NEMA

Publication No. MG-1 and shall be high efficiency design as determined by IEEE Standard

112, Method B. Motor design shall be for maximum efficiency. Nominal efficiency shall be

not less than those listed in Article 2.03, Motor Efficiencies.

D. If not specified otherwise, enclosure shall be open drip-proof. Stator windings shall be

copper. All motors shall have a 1.15 service factor. An oversize terminal box shall be

furnished.

E. Bearings shall be shielded, regreasable steel ball bearings.

F. Motor frame shall be drilled and tapped inside the terminal box for a grounding lug. A

terminal box lug may be used if it is drilled and tapped into the motor frame and is readily

accessible within the terminal box.

G. Insulation system shall be of Class F non-hygroscopic materials and shall be for continuous

operation in a 40 C. ambient.

H. Motor nameplates shall include motor full load power factor, efficiency, and maximum

kVAR capacitor.






2.3 MOTOR EFFICIENCIES

Motor

HP Min. Nameplate Efficiency

1 82.5

1.5 84.0

2 84.0

3 87.5

5 87.5

7.5 89.5

10 8.5

15 91.0

20 91.0

25 92.4

30 92.4

40 93.0

50 93.0

60 93.6

75 94.1

100 94.5

150 and up 95.0

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOTOR CIRCUITS

A. Motor circuits shall be provided as required by NFPA 70. The circuit shall include a motor

grounding conductor sized per NFPA 70, Table 250-122. Circuits from overhead runs shall

be anchored to the floor.

B. Motor connections shall be made in accordance with the motor nameplate for the proper

voltage and other operating characteristics, such as wye-delta or part winding starting.

C. Motor circuit conductors shall be terminated with lugs which are bolted to the motor leads.

Terminations shall be insulated with varnished cambric tape and then wrapped with a

weather resistant tape, 3M No. 33, or approved equal, or with Raychem MCK motor

connection kits.






3.2 INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST

A. All motors shall have an insulation resistance test, commonly referred to as being "megged,"

before they are energized. See Section 131815.08 – Ice System - Electrical Testing.

B. A tag shall be attached to each motor, shall be marked "Megged O.K." and shall be signed

and initialed by the electrician making the test. This same tag shall be used to mark the

rotation check.

3.3 NAMEPLATE CURRENT

A. Before any motor is energized, Contractor shall record the motor nameplate current and shall

size the motor starter overload heaters in accordance with the starter manufacturer's

recommendation for the given motor nameplate current and service.

3.4 ROTATION

A. Motor rotation shall be checked before the motor is connected to the driven equipment; that

is, before couplings are bolted together or belts are installed. The time for checking rotation

shall be arranged with the Contractor responsible for installing the equipment.

B. Before the motor is started to check rotation, electrician shall determine that the motor is

properly lubricated.

C. After correct rotation has been established, the insulation resistance test tags shall be marked

"Rotation O.K." and signed or initialed by the electrician and representative of the installing

contractor who check the motor rotation.






ICE SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL TESTING 131815.08 - 1

SECTION 131815.08 - ICE SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Equipment checks, adjustments, and tests.

B. Voltage and current measurements.

C. Motor tests.




C. Section 131815.01 – Ice System – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

1.3 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. All test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.

B. Voltage and current measurements shall be made with an instrument which measures true

RMS values and has an accuracy of +/- 1 percent of full scale. Scale shall be selected so that

the reading is not less than 1/2 scale.

C. Insulation resistance tests shall be made with a hand or line operated, 1000-volt D.C.

megohmmeter; James G. Biddle “Major Megger,” Associated Research, Inc. “Meg-Check,”

or approved equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. All equipment shall be given a thorough visual inspection to detect insofar as possible any

loose or erroneous connections, damaged components, the presence of foreign objects or

materials, poor workmanship, incorrect rating of protective devices, or other abnormal

conditions.





ICE SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL TESTING 131815.08 - 2

B. Every bolted or screwed connection or terminal shall have a torque wrench or torque

screwdriver applied to assure tightness before any equipment is energized. This shall apply

to both factory made and field made connections and terminations. Any problem or damage

resulting from a faulty connection or termination shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

Torque values shall be those published by the equipment manufacturer or as specified in the

applicable standards.

C. Covers shall be installed on all pull boxes, junction boxes, and raceway fittings before the

final inspection.

3.2 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MEASUREMENTS

A. Voltage measurements shall be made to confirm that voltage at the equipment is within the

nominal voltage range specified.

B. Current measurements shall be made as required to confirm that equipment is operating

within its nameplate rating.

3.3 MOTOR TESTS

A. All 460-volt motors shall have an insulation resistance (megger) test. Test shall be conducted

by applying 500 VDC phase to ground on each phase for 10 minutes with readings taken at

the end of 1 minute and 10 minutes. Minimum acceptable reading is 5 megohms.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all control and alarm

systems are functioning as specified. Contractor shall make all adjustments necessary to

obtain the proper operation of the above systems. This shall include but is not limited to

adjusting limit switches and temperature controls; providing the necessary type and quantity

of device, relay, and starter contacts; changing wire connections to device contacts; and

calibrating signal devices.

3.5 TEST REPORTS

A. Test results shall be tabulated neatly and legibly on typed report forms.

B. Two copies of all test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer within 72 hours after

completion of the test.






ICE RINK RAILINGS 131816 - 1

SECTION 131816 – ICE RINK RAILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Fabrication and installation of the ice rink perimeter railing system, consisting of galvanized steel

framed railing system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. System shall be

fabricated to allow for freeze in installation being easily removable for the off season. The

contractor shall be responsible for all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and services to

complete the project. The system shall include galvanized steel frames with bottom kickplate and

to rail base, polyethylene surfaced base plate and top rail, clear polycarbonate facing, gates,

treaded wood refrigeration header covers, and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete shop drawings and product data for all items including:

1. Steel framing and railings - include all connection and welding details, bill of materials,

and description of galvanized finish.

2. Polyethylene caprail and kickplate - include all connection and fastener details.

3. Clear carbonate railing infill.

4. All gate materials, fabrication details, and hardware.

5. Header box – include treated wood 2x framing and plywood cover, fiberglass facing,

adhered rubber flooring and galvanized steel clip anchors and bolts.

6. Loose laid insulation.

B. Submit material samples (5 full sets) for selection of colors as follows:

1. Polyethylene - minimum 4" squares of each color available.

2. Clear polycarbonate – minimum 4” squares.

3. Rubber flooring color samples – minimum 4” squares.


A. All materials shall be per plans and specifications and constructed, manufactured, and installed

per plans and specifications. All equipment and materials supplied under these specifications

shall be new and of the best grade materials and construction. Manufacturer must have

experience with fabrication of similar ice rink railing systems. All materials shall be new and of

highest grade. Railing manufacturer shall be Rink Systems ICE LOCK railing system or equal.






B. To receive approval prior to bid, railing contractors must:

1. Provide evidence of at least five (5) installations similar in construction to the following

specifications, each with a minimum of three (3) years’ operating experience prior to the

bidding date. A list of these installations including names, addresses, contacts, and

telephone numbers is to be included with requests for prior approval.

2. Submit a sample panel of proposed railing system being bid showing exactly how the system

will be manufactured. Samples shall show how shield mounting hardware will be attached to

frame, as well as gate latches, hinges, and related hardware.

3. Approval shall be obtained at least 10 days before the bid date.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warranty all equipment provided under this project against all defects in

materials and/or workmanship for a period of two years from the date of completed

installation.

1.5 DELIVERY

A. To be coordinated with the project prime Contractor to coincide with substantial completion of

the project. Railing system shall not be installed until all surrounding construction has been

substantially completed to reduce the possibility of damage to the finished surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. As noted in 1.3.A above.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Demountable Frame Railing Sections

1. Railing system shall be fabricated in demountable frame sections of nominal 8' lengths.

The design of all sections shall be fundamentally similar.

2. Each section shall be made of two horizontal 2" x 1-1/2” x 14 ga. galvanized steel

rectangular tubes used at the top and base locations. All horizontal tubes shall be welded

to end plates on each end of the frame.

3. End plates shall be made of a 2" x 2" x 1/8" steel angle. Each frame section end plate will

have three 9/16" matching holes to accommodate ½" thru bolts.

4. An additional 2” x 1-1/2" x 14 ga. steel rectangular tube shall be used vertically in the






center of any frame section over 48” long.

5. Each section is to be a complete welded construction. After the construction of the

framing and gates the steel is to be hot dip galvanized prior to installation of fiberglass,

poly, or wood coverings.

6. Nominal size of the railing sections is to be 96" long by 48 ½" high.

7. Nominal size of the header covers is 96” long by 33 3/8” wide by 18” high. The rink entry

platform shall be constructed in a single section to dimensions shown on the drawings.

B. Support Posts:

1. Separate demountable railing support posts shall be constructed of a 2" x 2" x 11GA steel

square tube.

2. At the bottom of support post shall be a 1/4" x 6" x 24" steel freeze-in foot plate welded

to the 2” x 2” steel tube. Provide ¼” gusset plate as shown on Drawings.

3. Each support post shall have two 3/8" holes to accommodate 5/16" through bolts for

attaching to the demountable frame section.

4. Each support post is to be a complete welded construction. After construction, each post

shall hot dip galvanized.

5. Two support posts shall be supplied for each 8’ demountable railing section.

6. Once assembled, dasherboard system shall be self-supporting without anchoring to ground.

C. Kickplate Facing:

1. The kickplate facing located at the bottom of the frame railing section shall be 3/8" (.375”)

thick fiberglass. Polyethylene is not acceptable.

2. The 3/8” fiberglass facing shall be attached to the steel framing with stainless steel #10 x

3/4" or 1-1/4" flathead self-drilling screws. Spacing of the screws shall not exceed 16" on

center. Heads of screws shall be painted to color match the fiberglass color. The use of

sheet metal screws to attach panels is not acceptable.

3. Color of fiberglass for curb backer panels, header covers, and entry platform shall be

selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer’s standard colors. A minimum of 5 distinct

color choices shall be provided. Color of curb facing shall be white.

D. Caprail:

1. High density polyethylene caprail, 3/4" thickness, shall be fastened to the top of the frame






railing sections. The caprail must have a smooth finish and be UV protected. The caprail

shall be attached to the top of railings with stainless steel #10 x 3/4" or 1-1/4" flathead self-

drilling screws at 1’-0” on center. The use of nylon rivets or sheet metal screws is not

acceptable. The front and back edges of the caprails shall have smooth, 3/8" radiused

edges.

2. Color of the caprail shall be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer’s standard

colors. A minimum of 5 distinct color choices shall be provided.

E. Gates:

1. Skater access gate shall be a single leaf gate with clear opening dimensions as shown on

the drawings.

2. Gates shall be built into 8' dasher panels and shall be left or right-hand swing as specified

in the drawings. Framing shall be galvanized steel channels, tubes and plates.

3. Hinge assemblies shall be designed to exceed all weight requirements at gate.

4. The single bar gate latch mechanism shall be designed so the gate can be closed and latched

in a single movement. The gate handle shall be designed so skaters wearing gloves can

easily open the gates. Latches shall be of solid welded steel construction. Spring loaded

bolt latches shall be unacceptable.

5. Hinges for all gates shall be of steel construction and bolted to the frame for easy

maintenance, two per gate door. Hinges to have horizontal and vertical adjustment. Hinges

shall have 1/2" diameter pins and grease fittings for lubrication purposes. Hinges shall be

designed so gates can be lifted off and removed. Piano style hinges or hinges welded to the

frame shall be unacceptable.

6. All single swing access and player gates shall have 3/8" x 3-1/2" x 3" door stops welded to

the frame gate. All gate with shielding shall be equipped with push button releases located

on the caprail. All fasteners shall be stainless steel with zinc dichromate coating for

enhanced corrosion resistance.

7. The gate shall be furnished with a 2” thickness white polyethylene threshold.

F. Hardware:

1. Hardware shall include hinges, latches, nuts, bolts, washers and miscellaneous fastening

devices as shown on the drawings or as necessary for a complete installation. All hardware

shall be stainless steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, or other corrosion resistant material.

2. Railing Contractor shall supply all new anchors and hardware as detailed on the drawings

required for the installation of the railing around the perimeter of the rink. Installation of

the drilled-in epoxy-set anchor inserts into the reinforced concrete plaza surface shall be

performed by the railing contractor to insure proper locations.






3. Each anchor shall be supplied with a bolt and washer to fasten railing system footplates,

as well as a flush brass plug to be utilized when railing system is removed. Twelve (12)

extra plugs shall be provided.

4. Provide 3/8” galvanized steel cable with clamps and turnbuckle tensioning device within

railing base framing around rink perimeter.

G. Demountable Frame Railing Section Infill Panels:

1. Polycarbonate, clear, 1/4” thickness, abrasion and UV resistant type. All exposed and non-

exposed edges ground and polished. SABIC Lexan MR Margard; Sheffield Makrolon AR;

or approved equal. Acrylic panels are not acceptable.

H. Header Box:

1. Header box shall be constructed of treated 2x4 and ¾” plywood. The box shall be constructed

in 8-foot sections and be demountable. The header box shall include the finishes shown

including adhered rubber flooring, fiberglass facing, and polyethylene trim. A galvanized

steel mounting plate shall be provided to easily fasten the header box in place to the railing

post.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install the complete railing system and accessories.

B. Manufacturer shall construct railing sections per plans and specifications. All materials shall be

installed to result in a complete railing system with all railings straight and true to line and

properly braced. Installation shall be done under the direct supervision of a factory representative

at all times.

C. Installation shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer’s requirements and instructions.

Erect units rigid, straight, level, plumb, and true with horizontal and vertical lines, securely

anchored in place. Whether shown on the drawings or not, this contractor shall provide all trim,

scribes, fillers and other accessory materials for a complete, finished installation. No defective,

scratched, marred or otherwise damaged materials shall be installed.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean all surfaces, removing all evidence of dirt, packaging materials and protective wrappings.

B. Replace all damaged materials.
